637571
18
Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/292
Nächste Seite
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap00_couv-imprimeur_deb_ed02-2016
Handbook
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap00_couv-imprimeur_deb_ed02-2016
On-line handbook
If the "MyCITROËN" function is not available on the CITROËN public website for your country,
youcanndyourhandbookatthefollowingaddress:
http://service.citroen.com/ddb/
FindyourhandbookontheCITROËNwebsite,under"MyCITROËN".
Select:
Select one of the following means of access to
viewyourhandbookon-line...
This personal and customisable space allows you to establish direct and special contact with the
manufacturer.
the language,
the vehicle, its body style,
theprinteditionofyourhandbookappropriateforthedateofregistrationofyourvehicle.
Scanthiscodefordirectaccesstoyourhandbook.
Referringtothehandbookon-linealsogives
you access to the latest information available,
easilyidentiedbythebookmark,associated
withthissymbol:
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap00a_Sommaire_ed02-2016
CITROËN has a presence on every continent,
a complete product range,
bringing together technology and a permanent spirit of innovation,
foramodernandcreativeapproachtomobility.
Wethankyouandcongratulateyouonyourchoice.
Happy motoring!
At the wheel of your new vehicle,
gettingtoknoweachsystem,
each control, each setting,
makesyourtrips,yourjourneys
morecomfortableandmoreenjoyable.
Key
safety warning
additional information
contributes to the protection of the environment
Thishandbookhasbeendesignedtohelp
youmakethemostofyourBerlingoinall
circumstancesandincompletesafety.
Takethetimetoreadthroughitsoasto
familiariseyourselfwithyourvehicle.
Thishandbookcoversallofthevariations
in equipment available across the whole
Berlingorange.
Yourvehiclewillbettedwithonlysomeof
the equipment described in this document,
depending on its trim level, version and the
specicationforthecountryinwhichitwas
sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are given as
indicationsonly.
Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right
to modify the technical characteristics,
equipment and accessories without having to
updatethiseditionofthehandbook.
This document forms an integral part of your
vehicle.Remembertopassitontothenew
ownerintheeventofthesaleofthevehicle.
2
Contents
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap00a_Sommaire_ed02-2016
Key 18
Alarm 20
Doors 21
Tailgate 23
Rearroofap 26
Centrallocking 27
Instrument panel 28
Date and time 29
Warning lamps 32
Fuel gauge 40
Coolant 40
Under-inationdetection 41
Under-inationdetection
with reinitialisation 43
Serviceindicator 47
Lighting dimmer 48
Steering wheel
adjustment 49
Manual gearbox 49
Gear shift indicator 50
6-speed electronic
gearbox 51
Stop & Start 53
Starting and stopping 55
Hill start assist 56
Driving
recommendations 57
Lighting 58
Wipers 61
Trip computer 63
Cruise control 64
Speedlimiter 67
Heating/Airconditioning
manual 70
digital 72
Demisting and
defrosting 75
Frontseats 77
Rearbenchseat 79
Rear seats
(5 seat version) 82
Rear seats
(7seatversion) 85
Modularity 92
Frontttings 94
Modutoproof 97
Roof bars 102
Courtesy lamps 103
Load space cover
(5 seat version) 104
Load space cover
(7seatversion) 108
Mirrors 110
Electric windows 112
READY TO GO
3.
18-57
SAFETY
5.
113-147
Exterior 5
Interior 6
left hand drive 6
righthanddrive 7
Instruments and controls 8
left hand drive 8
right hand drive 10
Technical data -
Maintenance 12
OVERVIEW 1.
4-14
General safety
recommendations 113
Hazard warning lamps 114
Horn 114
Parkingbrake 114
Parkingsensors 115
Reversingcamera 117
Anti-lockbrakingsystem
(ABS) 118
EBA 118
ASR and DSC 119
Grip control 120
ActiveCityBrake 122
Seat belts 126
Airbags 129
Carrying children 133
Deactivating the
passenger's front
airbag 136
Recommended seats 139
Installation 141
ISOFIX mountings 143
Recommended ISOFIX
seat 144
ISOFIXlocations 145
Childlock 147
EASE OF USE and
COMFORT
4.
58-112
ECO-DRIVING
2.
15-17
Environment 15
Eco-driving 16
The "Visual search"
(visual index) section
assistsyouinndingthe
controls and functions
and their associated page
numbers on the schematic
outlinesofthevehicle.
Instruments and controls
left hand drive 13
right hand drive 14
3
Contents
CONTENTS
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap00a_Sommaire_ed02-2016
Corresponds to
a left hand drive
vehicle.
Corresponds to a
right hand drive
vehicle.
TECHNOLOGY on
BOARD
10.
203-282
ACCESSORIES
6.
148-152
CHECKS
7.
153-169
QUICK HELP
8.
170-192
7-inchtouchscreen
tablet 203
Audio system 265
Towing a trailer 148
Towbar with detachable
swannecktowball 150
Other accessories 152
Opening the bonnet 154
Petrol engine 155
Diesel engine 156
Levels 157
Checks 159
Fuel 161
Fuel cut-off 163
Diesel priming pump 163
BlueHDi and AdBlue
®
164
Battery 170
Temporary puncture
repairkit 172
Changingawheel 173
Removable snow
screen 179
Snow chains 180
Changing
a bulb 181
afuse 187
a wiper blade 191
Being towed 192
TECHNICAL DATA 9.
193-201
Dimensions 193
Engines 197
Weights 197
Identication
markings 201
The "Technology on board"
section presents the new
audio/navigationsystems.
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed02-2016
PRESENTATION
Within the chapters, symbols
drawyourattentiontospecic
information:
directs you to the chapter and
section which contains detailed
information concerning a function,
indicates important information
relating to use of the equipment,
alerts you to the safety of
individuals and equipment on
board.
Foranyworkonyourvehicle,use
aqualiedworkshopthathasthe
technical information, competence and
equipment required, which a CITROËN
dealerisabletoprovide.
The equipment presented may be
standard, an option or not available,
depending on the model and can vary
from one country to another or not be
availableinallcountriesofsale.
5
1
OVERVIEW
Location
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed02-2016
EXTERIOR
Remote control 18-19
Changing the battery,
reinitialisation 19
Key 18
Starting 55
Hill start assist 56
Centrallocking/
unlocking 18,27
Filler cap,
fueltank 161-162
Fuel cut-off, Diesel
priming 163
AdBlue
®
, topping up
38-39, 164-169
Wiper blades 191
Door mirrors 110
Side repeaters 184
ActiveCityBrake 122-125
Front lamps, foglamps, direction
indicators 58-60, 181-184
Headlamp beam height
adjustment 60
Changing front bulbs 181-184
Snowcover 179
Front doors 21
Sliding side
doors 22-23
Key 18
Opening the bonnet 154
Childlock 147
Towing, lifting 192
Towbar,swannecktowball
148-151
Parkingsesnsors 115-116
Reversingcamera 117
Rearroofap 26
Emergency control 23
Sparewheel,jack,
changing a wheel,
tools 173-178
Temporary puncture
repairkit 172
Ination,pressures 201
Modutoproof 97-98,101
Roof bars 102
Rear lamps, direction indicators
58-59
3rdbrakelamp 186
Changing rear
bulbs 181-182, 185-186
Doors, tailgate 23-25
Accessories 152
Dimensions 193-196
Brakes,pads 114,157,159
Emergencybraking 118
ABS, EBFD 118
ASR, DSC 119
Grip control 120-121
ActiveCityBrake 122-125
Tyres, pressures 201
Snow chains 180
Tyreunder-inationdetection 41-42
Tyreunder-inationdetection
with reinitialisation 43-46
Number plate lamps 186
6
Location
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed02-2016
Rear view mirror 111
Front courtesy lamp 103
Changing courtesy
lamp bulbs 184
Front, lateral, curtain
airbags 129-132
Deactivating the passenger's
front airbag 132, 136
Battery, charging,
starting 170
Opening the bonnet 154
Rear windows 111
Frontseats,adjustments,
headrestraint 77-78
Seat
belts 107,126-128
Accessories 152
INTERIOR
Rearbenchseat 79-81
Rear seats (5-seat version)
82-84, 92
Seatconguration,
benches 92-93
Rear courtesy
lamp 103
Changing courtesy lamp bulbs 184
Rearttings 96
- oorboxes,
- aircraft style table,
- side blinds,
Modutoproof 97-98
Scented air freshener 99-100
Load space cover (5-seat version)
104
Load space cover
(7-seatversion) 108-109
Child seats 133-142, 146
ISOFIX mountings, seats 143-145
Parkingbrake,
handbrake 114
Rear seats
(7-seatversion) 85-91,93
Fittings
(7-seatversion) 106-107
- cup holder,
- 12Vsocket,
- stowing rings,
- storageap.
Towing, llifting 192
Towableloads 197-200
Sparewheel,jack,
changing a wheel,
tools 173-178
7
1
OVERVIEW
Location
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed02-2016
Rear view mirror 111
Front courtesy lamp 103
Changing courtesy
lamp bulbs 184
Front, lateral, curtain
airbags 129-132
Deactivating the passenger's
front airbag 132, 136
Battery, charging,
starting 170
Opening the bonnet 154
Rear windows 111
Frontseats,adjustments,
headrestraint 77-78
Seat
belts 107,126-128
Accessories 152
INTERIOR
Rearbenchseat 79-81
Rear seats
(5-seat version) 82-84, 92
Seatconguration,
benches 92-93
Rear courtesy lamp 103
Changing courtesy
lamp bulbs 184
Rearttings 96
- oorboxes,
- aircraft style table,
- side blinds,
Modutoproof 97-98
Scented air freshener 99-100
Load space cover (5-seat version)
104
Load space cover
(7-seatversion) 108-109
Child seats 133-142, 146
ISOFIX mountings, seats 143-145
Parkingbrake,
handbrake 114
Rear seats
(7-seatversion) 85-91,93
Fittings
(7-seatversion) 106-107
- cup holder,
- 12Vsocket,
- stowing rings,
- storageap.
Towing, llifting 192
Towableloads 197-200
Sparewheel,jack,
changing a wheel,
tools 173-178
8
Location
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed02-2016
ASR-ESC 119
Parkingsensors 115-116
Electric mirrors 110
Headlampbeamheightadjustment
60
Stop & Start 53-55
Cruise control 64-66
Speedlimiter 67-69
Lighting 58-60
Foglamps 59
LED daytime running lamps 59
Automatic illumination
of headlamps 59-60
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Dashboard, passenger
compartmentfuses 187-189
Opening the bonnet 154
Parkingbrake 114
Instrument panels,
screens, dials 28-29
Setting the time in
the instrument panel 29
Warning lamps, indicator lamps
32-39
Indicators,fuelgauge 40,47-48
Lighting dimmer 48
Gear shift
indicator 50
Wipers 61-62
Automatic rain sensitive wipers 61
Screen wash 62, 158
Trip computer 63
Steeringwheeladjustment 49
Horn 114
Ignition switch 55
6-speed electronic
gearbox 51-52
Steeringmountedcontrols:
- Touch screen tablet 206
- Audiosystem 267
9
1
OVERVIEW
Location
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed02-2016
Rear view mirror 111
Child surveillance mirror 111
Screens,menus 28,207,268
Setting the time in the screen 30-31
Controls
- centrallocking 27
- electricchildlock 147
- electric windows 112
- hazard warning
lamps 114
Heating, ventilation
- heating 70-71,74
- airconditioningA/C 70-71,74
Digital air
conditioning 72-73,74
Demisting/defrosting 75-76
Courtesy lamps 103, 184
Frontttings 94-95
- storagecompartment.
- glove box,
- bottle holder,
- bag holder,
- centre console,
- overhead storage,
- sun visor,
- storageunderseats.
Touch screen tablet 203-263
Audio system 265-282
Reversingcamera 117
Deactivating the passenger's
front airbag 132, 136
Manual gearbox 49
"Grip control" 120-121
10
Location
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed02-2016
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Dashboard, passenger
compartmentfuses 187-189
Opening the bonnet 154
Frontttings 94-95
- storagecompartment.
- glove box,
- bottle holder,
- bag holder,
- centre console,
- overhead storage,
- sun visor,
- storageunderseats.
Rear view mirror 111
Child surveillance mirror 111
Manual gearbox 49
Touch screen tablet 203-263
Audio system 265-282
Reversingcamera 117
Controls:
- centrallocking 27
- electricchildlock 147
- electric windows 112
- hazard warning
lamps 114
"Grip control" 120-121
Heating, ventilation
- heating 70-71,74
- airconditioningA/C 70-71,74
Digital air
conditioning 72-73,74
Demisting/defrosting 75-76
Courtesy lamps 103, 184
Screens,menus 28,207,268
Setting the time in the screen 30-31
11
1
OVERVIEW
Location
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed02-2016
Cruise control 64-66
Speedlimiter 67-69
Lighting 58-60
Foglamps 59
LED daytime running lamps 59
Automatic illumination
of headlamps 59-60
Parkingbrake 114
Instrument panels,
screens, dials 28-29
Setting the time in
the instrument panel 29
Warning lamps, indicator lamps
32-39
Indicators,fuelgauge 40,47-48
Lighting dimmer 48
Gear shift
indicator 50
Steeringwheeladjustment 49
Horn 114
Ignition switch 55
Wipers 61-62
Automatic rain sensitive wipers
61
Screen wash 62, 158
Trip computer 63
Steeringmountedcontrols:
- Touch screen tablet 206
- Audiosystem 267
Deactivating the passenger's
front airbag 132, 136
ASR-ESC 119
Parkingsensors 115-116
Electric mirrors 110
Headlampbeamheightadjustment
60
Stop & Start 53-55
6-speed electronic
gearbox 51-52
12
Location
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed02-2016
TECHNICAL DATA - MAINTENANCE
Identicationmarkings,
serial number,
paint code, tyres 201
Windscreen wash, level 158
Changing bulbs,
lighting 181-186
Checks 159-160
- battery,
- brakepads,
- brakedrums,discs.
- parkingbrake,
-
carbon/passengercompartmentlter,
- oillter,
- particlelter,
- gearbox,
Emissions control 41
Enginefuses 187,190
Opening the bonnet, stay 154
Levels 157-158
- engineoildipstick,
- brakeuid,
- coolant.
- powersteeringuid,
- Diesel additive,
Bleedingwater,Diesellter 160
Warning lamps 32-39
Under the bonnet
- Diesel 156
- petrol 155
Fuel cut-off, Diesel
priming 163
AdBlue
®
164-169
Dimensions 193-196
Petrolengines/
weights 197-198
Dieselengines/
weights 197,199-200
13
1
OVERVIEW
Presentation
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed02-2016
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Lighting and direction indicator
stalk.
2. Instrumentpanelwithscreen.
3. Wipers, screenwash, trip computer
controlstalk.
4. Ignition.
5. Audiosystemcontrols.
6. Driver'sfrontairbag,horn.
7. Steering wheel height and reach
adjustment.
8. Cruise control, speed limiter
controls.
9. Switchpanel,parkingsensors,
headlampbeamadjustment,ESC,
Stop&Start.
10.Bonnetrelease.
11. Electricdoormirroradjustment.
12.Electricwindowswitches.
13.Switchpanel:hazardwarninglamps,
centrallocking,childlock.
14.Cigarettelighter.
15.Heating-ventilationcontrols.
16. Electronic gearbox controls or
Gripcontrolbutton.
17.TouchscreentabletScreen.
18.USBport(withelectronicgearbox).
19.USBport(withmanualgearbox).
14
Presentation
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed02-2016
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Lighting and direction indicator
controlstalk.
2. Instrumentpanelwithscreen.
3. Wiper, screenwash, trip computer
controlstalk.
4. Ignitionswitch.
5. Audiosystemcontrols.
6. Driver'sfrontairbag,horn.
7. Steering wheel height and reach
adjustment.
8. Cruise control, speed limiter
controls.
9. Switchpanel,parkingsensors,
headlampbeamadjustment,ESC,
Stop&Start,alarm.
10.Bonnetreleaselever.
11. Electricdoormirrorcontrols.
12.Electricwindowswitches.
13.Switchpanel:hazardwarning,central
locking,childlock.
14.Cigarettelighter.
15.Heating-ventilationcontrols.
16. Electronic gearbox controls or Grip
controlbutton.
17.Touchscreentablet.
18.USBport(withelectronicgearbox).
19.USBport(withmanualgearbox).
15
2
ECO-DRIVING
Motoring & the Environment
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap02_eco-conduite_ed02-2016
ENVIRONMENT
With you, CITROËN acts to protect the
environment.
We invite you to visit the
www.citroen.co.ukwebsite.
As the driver, you also can contribute
to protecting the environment in the
followingway:
- drive smoothly, without frequent
and harsh acceleration,
- observe the service intervals;
we recommend that services are
carried out by a CITROËN dealer,
authorised to collect used batteries
anduids,
- in order to preserve the reliability
of the engine and emission control
systems, do not use engine oil
additives.
Refer to information on eco-driving
attheendofthissection.
16
Motoring & the Environment
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap02_eco-conduite_ed02-2016
Eco-driving is a range of everyday
practices that allow the motorist to
optimise their fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions.
Eco-driving
Optimise the use of your
gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off
gentlyandchangeupwithoutwaiting.
Duringaccelerationchangeupearly.
With an automatic or electronic
gearbox, give preference to automatic
mode and avoid pressing the
acceleratorpedalheavilyorsuddenly.
Thegearefciencyindicatorinvites
youtoengagethemostsuitablegear:
as soon as the indication is displayed
in the instrument panel, follow it
straightaway.
Forvehiclesttedwithanelectronic
or automatic gearbox, this indicator
appearsonlyinmanualmode.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between
vehicles,useenginebrakingrather
thanthebrakepedal,andpressthe
acceleratorprogressively.These
practices contribute towards a
reduction in fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions and also help to reduce
thebackgroundtrafcnoise.
Ifyourvehiclehascruisecontrol,make
use of the system at speeds above
25mph(40km/h)whenthetrafcis
owingwell.
Control the use of your
electrical equipment
Switch off the demisting and
defrostingcontrols,ifnotautomatic.
Switch off the heated seat as soon as
possible.
Switch off the headlamps and front
foglamps when the level of light does
notrequiretheiruse.
Avoid running the engine before
moving off, particularly in winter; your
vehicle will warm up much faster
whiledriving.
As a passenger, if you avoid
connecting your multimedia devices
(lm,music,videogame...),you
will contribute towards limiting the
consumption of electrical energy, and
sooffuel.
Disconnect your portable devices
beforeleavingthevehicle.
Before moving off, if the passenger
compartment is too warm, ventilate it
by opening the windows and air vents
beforeusingtheairconditioning.
Above30mph(50km/h),closethe
windowsandleavetheairventsopen.
Remembertomakeuseofequipment
thatcanhelpkeepthetemperature
in the passenger compartment down
(sunroofandwindowblinds...).
Switch off the air conditioning, unless
it has automatic regulation, as soon as
thedesiredtemperatureisattained.
17
2
ECO-DRIVING
Motoring & the Environment
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap02_eco-conduite_ed02-2016
Limit the causes of excess
consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle;
place the heaviest items in the bottom
of the boot, as close as possible to
therearseats.
Limit the loads carried in the
vehicle and reduce wind resistance
(roofbars,roofrack,bicycle
carrier,trailer...).Usearoofboxin
preference.
Removeroofbarsandroofracks
afteruse.
At the end of winter, remove snow
tyresandretyoursummertyres.
Observe the recommendations
on maintenance
Checkthetyrepressuresregularly,
when cold, referring to the label in the
dooraperture,driver'sside.
Carryoutthischeckinparticular:
- beforealongjourney,
- at each change of season,
- afteralongperiodoutofuse.
Don't forget the spare wheel and the
tyresonanytrailerorcaravan.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly
(engineoil,oillter,airlter,passenger
compartmentlter...)andobservethe
schedule of operations recommended
inthemanufacturer'sserviceschedule.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the
SCR system is faulty your vehicle
becomes polluting; go to a CITROËN
dealeroraqualiedworkshopwithout
delay to have the emissions of nitrogen
oxidesbroughtbacktothelegallevel.
When refuelling, do not continue after
the third cut-off of the nozzle to avoid
anyoverow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle,
itisonlyaftertherst1800miles
(3000kilometres)thatyouwillsee
the fuel consumption settle down to a
consistentaverage.
18
Access
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Thislocksandunlocksthevehicle's
doors,opensandclosesthefuelller
cap, as well as starting and stopping
theengine.
KEY REMOTE CONTROL
Unlocking
Locking
Pressthisbuttontolockallof
yourvehicle'sdoors.
Thedirectionindicatorsashonce.
If one of the doors is open or is not
closedcorrectly,thecentrallockingwill
notwork.
Deadlocking
A second press on the closed
padlockontheremotecontrolwithin
vesecondsafterlockingchangesthe
lockingtodeadlocking.
Thisisconrmedbyxedlighting
of the direction indicators for
approximatelytwoseconds.
Deadlockingrenderstheexterior
and interior door opening handles
inoperative:donotleaveanyoneinside
thevehiclewhenitisdeadlocked.
Ifdeadlockingisactivatedfrominside
the vehicle using the remote control, it
willchangetonormallockingwhenthe
vehicleisstarted.
Pressthisbuttontounlockall
ofyourvehicle'sdoors.
Thedirectionindicatorsashtwice.
19
Access
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Good practice
Takecarenottoallowtheremote
control to come into contact with
grease, dust, rain or a damp
environment.
Aheavyobjectattachedtothekey
(keyring,...)weighingontheshaft
ofthekeyintheswitch,maycausea
malfunction.
REMOTE CONTROL
Reinitialising the remote
control
Following changing of the remote
control battery or disconnection of the
vehicle battery, the remote control may
havetobereinitialised.
Wait at least one minute before using
theremotecontrol.
Insertthekeyintheignitionswitchwith
thebuttons(padlocks)oftheremote
controlfacingyou.
Switchontheignition.
Pressthelockingpadlockforat
leastvesecondswithinthenext
tenseconds.
Switchofftheignition.
Wait at least one minute before using
theremotecontrol.
Theremotecontrolisnowworking
again.
Use only identical batteries or
batteries of an equivalent type to
those recommended by CITROËN
dealers.
Do not discard the remote control
batteries, they contain metals which
areharmfultotheenvironment.
Deposit them at a CITROËN
dealership, or at an authorised
collectionpoint.
Unfolding / folding
Changing the battery
Batteryref.:CR1620/3volts.
The"batteryat"informationisgiven
by an audible signal, accompanied by
amessageinthescreen.
To replace the battery, unclip the
casingusingacoinatthering.
Iftheremotecontroldoesnotwork
after the battery has been changed,
reinitialisetheremotecontrol.
Thereisariskofdamageifthe
replacement battery is not the correct
type.
If you do not press the button,
youmaydamagethekey's
foldingmechanism.
20
Access
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Don't forget
Whenleavingthevehicle,checkthat
the lighting is off and nothing of value
isvisible.
As a safety precaution (with children
onboard),removethekeyfromthe
ignition when leaving the vehicle, even
forashorttime.
Good practice
Donotmakeanymodicationstothe
electronicimmobilisersystem.
Operating the remote control, even
whenitisinyourpocket,mayresultin
involuntaryunlockingofthedoors.
The simultaneous use of other
high frequency equipment (mobile
telephones, domestic alarms…), may
interfere with the operation of the
remotecontroltemporarily.
The remote control does not operate
whilethekeyisintheignition,evenif
theignitionisoff.
ELECTRONIC
IMMOBILISER
If you lose your keys
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the
vehicle'sV5registrationcerticateand
youridenticationdocument.
A CITROËN dealer will be able
toretrievethekeycodeand
the transponder code so that a
replacementkeycanbeordered.
When purchasing a second-hand
vehicle,havethekeysmemorisedby
a CITROËN dealer, so as to be sure
thatthekeysinyourpossessionare
the only ones that can be used to start
thevehicle.
ALARM
Ifttedonyourvehicle,thisprovides
twotypesofprotection:
- exteriorprotection:itsoundsifa
front/reardoororthebonnetis
opened.
- interiorprotection:itsoundsif
the volume inside the passenger
compartmentchanges(breakingof
a window or a movement inside the
vehicle).
Ifyourvehicleisttedwithaseparation
partition, the interior protection is not
activeintheloadspace.
Locking the vehicle with
complete alarm
Setting the alarm
- Switch off the ignition and get out of
thevehicle.
- Setthealarmwithinveminutesof
gettingoutofthevehicle,bylocking
ordeadlockingusingtheremote
control.TheredLED,locatedinthe
button,ashesoncepersecond.
Allofthekeyscontainanelectronic
immobiliserdevice.
Thisdevicelockstheenginesupply
system.Itisactivatedautomatically
whenthekeyisremovedfromthe
ignition.
After the ignition is switched on, a
dialogueisestablishedbetweenthekey
andtheelectronicimmobilisersystem.
Themetalpartofthekeymustbe
unfolded correctly for correct dialogue
totakeplace.
21
Access
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
FRONT DOORS
From the inside
Usethedooropeningcontroltounlock
andopenthedoorconcerned.
From the outside
Usetheremotecontroltolock/unlock
thevehicle.
Insertthemetalpartofthekeyinthe
lockonthedriver'ssideiftheremote
controldoesnotwork.
Disarming
- Unlockthevehiclewiththeremote
control or switch on the ignition, the
redLEDgoesoff.
Locking the vehicle with
exterior protection only
If, while you are away from the vehicle,
you wish to leave a window partially
open or a pet inside the vehicle, you
shouldchooseexteriorprotectiononly.
- Switchofftheignition.
-
In the next ten seconds,
press the button until the
redLEDisoncontinuously.
- Getoutofthevehicle.
- Withinthenextveminutes,set
thealarmbylockingordeadlocking
using the remote control (the red
LEDashesonceasecond).
Triggering
The siren sounds, the direction indicators
ashforapproximately30secondsand
theredLEDashesrapidly.
-
Toswitchitoff,insertthekeyand
switchontheignition.
When the alarm has been triggered ten
times in succession (when triggered for the
eleventhtime)itisdeactivated.Repeatthe
procedureforsettingthealarm.
Locking the vehicle without
alarm
- Insertthekeyinthelockonthe
driver'sdoorandlockit.
Do not set the alarm when washing
yourvehicle.
Failure of the remote control
When the alarm is set but the remote
controldoesnotoperate:
-
Unlockthedoorswiththekeyand
openthedoor.Thealarmistriggered.
- Switch on the ignition in the
nexttenseconds.Thealarmis
disarmed.
Incorrect operation
When the ignition is switched on, if the
red LED remains on for ten seconds,
thereisafaultinthesirenconnection.
Contact a CITROËN dealer to have the
systemchecked.
Automatic setting of the alarm
Depending on the country in which
the vehicle is sold, the alarm is set
automatically approximately 2 minutes
afterthelastdoorisclosed.
To prevent triggering of the alarm when
a door is opened, you have to press
theremotecontrolunlockingbutton
again.
Donotmakeanymodications
to the alarm system as this could
causefaults.
22
Access
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
SLIDING SIDE DOORS
From the outside
Pull the handle towards you then
towards the rear and open the side
door guiding the rearward sliding to
beyond the point of resistance to hold
itopen.
A mechanical system prevents opening
of the left-hand side door when the fuel
llerapisopen.
From the inside
Unlockthesidedoorusingthishandle
and open it, guiding the rearward
slidingtothepointofresistance.Pass
thispointtoholdthedooropen.
Close the side door using the handle
to start the sliding and pass the point
ofresistance.Then,usetheshaped
recess at the top of the door pillar to
guidethedooruntilitlocks.
Do not use the grab handle to slide the
door.
Good practice
Takecarenottoblocktheguidespace
ontheoortoallowthedoortoslide
correctly.
Ifyourvehicleisparkedonaslope,
guidetheslidingofthesidedoor.In
fact, the door could open or close more
rapidly due to the slope of the ground
andcouldcauseinjury.
For safety and operation reasons, do
not drive with the sliding side doors
open.
23
Access
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Operation in the event
of a battery failure
Front and side passenger doors
In the event of a battery or of the
centrallockingfault,usethelockto
lockthedoorsmechanically.
- To open the door and get out of the
vehicle,pulltheinteriorcontrol.
- Tolockthedoor,insertthekeyin
thelock,locatedontheedgeofthe
door, then turn it one eighth of a
turn.
Driver's door
- Insertthekeyinthelock,thenturn
ittotherighttolockortotheleftto
unlock.
TAILGATE
From inside
(emergency control)
Intheeventofacentralunlocking
operatingfault,thispermitsunlocking
ofthetailgatefromtheinside.
Insert a small screwdriver in the
opening, between the tailgate and the
oor.Tounlockthelock,movethe
catchtotheleftthenpushthetailgate.
Opening
From outside
Locking/unlockingisbymeansofthe
remotecontrol.
To open, press the control below the
trimthenraisethetailgate.
A pull strap is available to close the
tailgatefromthehighposition.
Guide the closing of the tailgate to the
balance point of its travel then push on
thetailgatetocloseitfully.
24
Access
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
HINGED REAR DOORS
From outside
Toopen,pullthehandletowardsyou.
Pull the lever to open the right-hand
door.
To close, start with the right-hand door
thenclosetheleft-handdoor.
Withtheroofrearap,therearbumper
has been reinforced to serve as a
footrestwhenenteringthevehicle.
The hinged rear doors are
asymmetrical(2/3-1/3),withthe
smallerdoorontheright.
Theyarettedwithacentrallock.
Tailgate screen
The opening rear screen allows you to
access the rear of the vehicle directly,
withouthavingtoopenthetailgate.
Opening
Afterunlockingthevehicleusingthe
remotecontrolorthekey,pressthe
control and raise the rear screen to
openit.
Closing
Close the rear screen by pressing
the centre of the glass until it is fully
closed.
The tailgate and tailgate screen
cannot both be open at the
same time, to prevent damage to
thescreen.
25
Access
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
In practice
It is possible to drive with the right-
handdooropentomakeiteasierto
carrylongloads.Theleft-handdooris
keptclosedbythedistinctive"yellow"
lock,positionedatthebaseofthedoor.
This closed door must not be used as
aloadretainer.
Driving with the right-hand door open
isaspecialdispensation.Complywith
the usual safety indications to warn
otherdrivers.
From inside
When present on the vehicle, pulling
this handle towards you opens the left-
handdoor.
Opening to approximately 180°
Acheckstrapsystempermitsextension
of the opening from approximately 90°
toapproximately180°.
Pull the yellow control when the door is
open.
Thecheckstrapwillengageagain
automaticallyonclosing.
Whenparkedwiththe
rear doors open to 90°,
thedoorsmasktherear
lamps.Tosignalyour
position to other road
users driving in the same
direction who may not
have seen your vehicle,
use a warning triangle
or other device required
by the legislation in your
country.
26
Access
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
REAR ROOF FLAP
Support bar
A support bar is provided for
transporting long loads, after opening
therearroofap.
Foldbackthesupportbarbyliftingthe
lever.
Guideittothedoorpillar.
Support the long loads to be
transported, lift them and reposition the
supportbarwithonehand.
Ensure that it is secured correctly by
pressing the handle downwards past
the point of resistance and secure the
loadsrmly.
The rear bumper has been
reinforced to serve as a footrest
whenenteringthevehicle.
Thereardoorsonlylockwhenthe
supportbarisinstalled.
Whentherearroofapisopen,take
care when driving where height is
restricted.
Never rest loads directly on the rear
doors.
Comply with the usual indications, to
warnotherdrivers.
Reservetheuseoftherearroofap
forshortjourneys.
The side supports can be used as
hookingpoints.
- lowertheblackpaddletosecure
therearroofap.
Securingtherearroofapplacesiton
the seal correctly and ensures sealing
withoutnoise.
Thisrearroofapisonlycompatible
withside-hingedreardoors.
Toopentherearroofap:
- raisetheblackpaddleofthetoggle,
- relieve the toggle by pressing the
rearroofap(downwards)then
releasethehook,
- lifttherearroofap,
- pass the point of resistance to
securetherearroofapusingthe
supportstays.
Neverdrivewithoutthestaysinplace.
Toclosetherearroofap:
- checkthatthesupportbaris
secured correctly,
- lowertherearroofap,
- whilepressingtherearroofap
(downwards),takeholdofthe
two loops of the spring then place
thehookinitshousing,
Never attach any load to the rear roof
ap.
Never drive without the support bar in
place.
27
Access
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
CENTRAL LOCKING
An initial press permits
centrallockingofthevehicle,
when all of the doors are
closed.
Door open warning lamp
ThecontrolswitchLED:
- asheswhenthedoorsarelocked
with the vehicle stationary and the
engine off,
- comes on when the doors are
lockedandfromthetimethe
ignitionisswitchedon.
Anti-intrusion security
If this warning lamp comes
on,checkthatallofyour
vehicle's doors are closed
correctly.
Locking while driving
When the vehicle moves off, as soon
as you reach approximately 6 mph
(10km/h),thesystemlocksthedoors.
Thecharacteristiccentrallockingnoise
isheard.TheLEDintheswitchonthe
dashboardcentralswitchpanelcomeson.
Duringthejourney,openingadoor
resultsincompleteunlockingofthe
vehicle.
Activating / deactivating the
function
With the ignition on, press
and hold this switch to
activate or deactivate the
function.
Drivingwiththedoorslockedmay
makeaccesstotheinteriormore
difcultinanemergency.
A second press permits central
unlockingofthevehicle.
The control is inactive when the vehicle
hasbeenlockedusingtheremote
controlorthekeyfromtheoutside.
The doors can still be opened from the
inside.
28
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Dials
1. Distancerecorderinkilometres/
miles.
2. Displayscreen.
3. Fuel gauge, coolant temperature
gauge.
4. Revcounter.
5. Tripdistancerecorder/service
indicatorreset.
6. Instrumentpanellightingdimmer.
Level 1
INSTRUMENT PANEL Display screens Screens
The format of the information
presented in the screen depends on
thevehicle'sequipmentlevel.
Level 2
with the touch screen tablet
29
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Centre console with screen
Instrument panel without screen
- Turntotheleft:24Hor12His
displayed.
- Turn to the right to select 24H
or12H.
- Turn to the left to complete the time
adjustment.
After approximately 30 seconds
without any action, the screen returns
tothenormaldisplay.
DATE AND TIME
Centre console without screen
The display - time sequence
islinkedaccordingtomodel
(version).Theaccessto
the"Date"adjustmentis
only active when the model
versionoffersadateinwords.
Toadjustthetime,usethe
left-hand button on the
instrumentpanel:
- Turntotheleft:theminutesash.
- Turn to the right to increase the
minutes (hold the button to the right
forrapidscrolling).
- Turntotheleft:thehoursash.
- Turn to the right to increase the
hours (hold the button to the right
forrapidscrolling).
30
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Screen C
Press the MENUbutton.
Using the arrows, select
PERSONALISATION
CONFIGURATION.
Presstoconrmthe
selection.
Using the arrows, select
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION.
Presstoconrmthe
selection.
Using the arrows, select
ADJUST DATE AND TIME.
Presstoconrmthe
selection.
Adjustthesettingsoneby
oneconrmingbypressing
the OKbutton.
Then select the OK tab in the
screenandconrm.
31
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Touch screen tablet
F Select the "Conguration"
menu.
F In the secondary page,
press on "Time/Date".
F Select "Adjust time" or "Adjust
date" and modify the settings using
thenumberkeypad,thenconrm.
F Press "Conrm"toquit.
32
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
WARNING LAMPS
Warning lamp is indicates Solution - action
STOP
on, associated
with another
warning
lamp and
accompanied
by a message
inthescreen.
majorfaultslinkedwith
the"Brakeuidlevel",
"Engine oil pressure and
temperature", "Coolant
temperature", "Electronic
brakeforcedistribution"and
"Power steering" warning
lamps.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do
so. Park and switch off the ignition. Have it
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualied
workshop.
Parking
brake /
Brake uid
level / EBFD
on.
thattheparkingbrakeisapplied
orhasnotbeenreleasedfully.
Releasingtheparkingbrakeswitchesoffthe
warninglamp.
on. lowbrakeuidlevel. TopupusingauidrecommendedbyCITROËN.
remaining on even
though the level
is correct and
associated with the
ABSwarninglamp.
a fault with the electronic
brakeforcedistribution.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park and switch off the ignition.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualied workshop.
Engine oil
pressure and
temperature
on while
driving.
low pressure or a high
temperature.
Parkandswitchofftheignitionthenallowtocool.
Visuallycheckthelevel.
Chapter7,"Levels"section.
remaining on,
even though the
leveliscorrect.
amajorfault.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualiedworkshop.
Eachtimethevehicleisstarted:aseriesofwarninglampscomesonapplyingaself-testcheck.Theygooffalmost
immediately.
Enginerunning:thelampbecomesawarningifitremainsoncontinuouslyorashes.
Thisinitialwarningmaybeaccompaniedbyanaudiblesignalandamessageinthescreen.
Donotignorethesewarnings.
33
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Warning lamp is indicates Solution - action
Coolant
temperature
and level
on with needle
in the red
zone.
an abnormal increase in
temperature.
Parkandswitchofftheignitionthenallowtocool.
Visuallycheckthelevel.
ashing. adropinthecoolantlevel.
Chapter7,"Levels"section.
ContactaCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshop.
Service
ontemporarily. minorfaultsorwarnings.
Consultthealertloginthedisplayorscreen.
If your vehicle is equipped with a trip computer or
ascreen:refertothe"Steeringmountedcontrols"
sectioninChapter4.
ContactaCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshop.
remainingon. majorfaults.
Seat belt not
fastened
on then
ashing.
thedriverand/orfront
passenger has not fastened
theirseatbelt.
Pullthestraptheninsertthetongueinthebuckle.
accompanied
by an audible
signal then
remainson.
the vehicle is moving with
thedriver'sand/orfront
passenger's seat belt not
fastened.
Checkthattheseatbeltisfastenedbypullingthe
strap.
Chapter5,"Seatbelts"section.
ECO
on.
The Stop & Start system
has put the engine in STOP
mode following a vehicle
stop(redlight,trafcjam,
etc...).
As soon as you want to move off, the warning
lamp goes off and the engine restarts
automaticallyinSTARTmode.
ashesfora
few seconds,
thengoesoff.
STOP mode is temporarily
unavailable.
or
START mode has been
invokedautomatically.
Chapter3,"Stop&Start"section.
34
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Warning lamp is indicates Solution - action
Front / lateral
airbag
ashingor
remainingon.
afailureofanairbag.
HavethesystemcheckedbyaCITROËNdealer
oraqualiedworkshopwithoutdelay.
Chapter5,"Airbags"section.
Front
passenger's
airbag
deactivated
on.
the intentional deactivation
of this airbag in the
presence of a rearward
facingchildseat.
Chapter5,"Airbags"or"childsafety"section.
Low fuel
level
on with gauge
needle in the
redzone.
Whenitrstcomeson,
there remains around
8litresoffuelinthetank.
The distance you can drive
on this fuel depends on
your style of driving and the
enginetype.
Youmustllupwithfueltoavoidrunningout.
This warning lamp comes on each time you
switchontheignitionuntilyouhavelledup.
Capacityofthetank:approximately60litres(or
55litresaccordingtoversion).
Neverriskdrivinguntilthetankisempty,this
coulddamagetheemissionsandinjection
systems.
ashing.
cutting off of the fuel supply
followingaseriousimpact.
Restorethesupply.
Chapter7,"Fuel"section.
EOBD
emission
control
system
ashingor
remainingon.
afailureofthesystem.
Thereisariskofdamagetothecatalytic
converter.HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËN
dealeroraqualiedworkshop.
Battery
charge
on.
a fault in the charging
circuit.
Checkthebatteryterminals,…
Chapter8,"Battery"section.
ashing.
placing of the active
functions on standby
(economymode).
Chapter8,"Battery"section.
remaining on,
in spite of the
checks.
anignitionorinjection
malfunction.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualiedworkshop.
+
ABS
35
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Warning lamp is indicates Solution - action
Power
steering
on.
a fault with the
system.
Thevehicleretainsconventionalsteeringwithoutassistance.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshop.
Door open
detection
on and accompanied
by a message in the
screen.
that a door is not
closedcorrectly.
Checkthatallofthedoorsareclosed.
ABS remainingon.
a fault with the anti-
lockbrakingsystem.
Thevehicleretainsconventionalbraking.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualiedworkshop.
ESC
ashing.
triggering of the ASR
orDSCregulation.
The system optimises traction and improves the
directionalstabilityofthevehicle.
Chapter5,"Drivingsafety"section.
remainingon.
a fault with the
system.
E.g.:under-ination
ofthetyres.
E.g.:checkthepressureofthetyres.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualiedworkshop.(Wheelspeedsensor,
hydraulicvalveblock,...).
Under-
ination
on.
the tyre pressure is
too low in or more
wheels.
Checkthetyrepressureassoonaspossible.
Thischeckmustbedonewiththetyrescold.
ashingthen
remaining on,
accompanied by the
Service warning
lamp, and depending
on equipment, the
displayofamessage.
the tyre pressure
monitoring system
has a fault or one of
the wheels does not
haveasensor.
Detectionofunder-inationisnolongerassured.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualiedworkshop.
Particle lter on.
a problem with the
particlelter(fuel
additivelevel,riskof
blockage,...).
HavetheltercheckedbyaCITROËNdealeror
aqualiedworkshop.
Chapter7,"Levels"section.
36
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Warning lamp is indicates Solution - action
Dipped beam
headlamps /
Daytime
running
lamps
on.
a manual selection or
automatic illumination of
headlamps.
Turntheringonthelightingcontrolstalktothe
secondposition.
illumination of the dipped beam headlamps
fromthetimetheignitionisswitchedon:
daytime running lamps (depending on the
countryinwhichthevehicleissold).
Chapter4,"Steeringmountedcontrols"section.
Main beam
headlamps
pullingofthestalktowards
you.
Pullthestalktoreturntodippedbeam
headlamps.
Direction
indicators
ashingwith
audiblesignal.
a change of direction via
thelightingstalk.
Flashingright:pushstalkdownwards.
Flashingleft:pushstalkupwards.
Front
foglamps
on. amanualselection.
The foglamps only operate if the sidelamps or
dippedbeamheadlampsareon.
Rear
foglamps
on. amanualselection.
The foglamps only operate if the sidelamps or
dippedbeamheadlampsareon.
In conditions of normal visibility, switch them off
toavoidbreakingthelaw.
"Thislampisadazzlingred".
37
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Warning lamp
in the screen
is indicates Solution - action
Cruise
control
on. cruisecontrolselected.
Manualselection.
Chapter4,"Steeringmountedcontrols"section.
Speed limiter on. speedlimiterselected.
Manualselection.
Chapter4,"Steeringmountedcontrols"section.
Gear shift
indicator
on.
a recommendation
independent of the type and
densityoftrafc.
To reduce fuel consumption, change to an
appropriategearwithamanualgearbox.
The driver retains responsibility to follow this
indicationornot.
Diesel
pre-heating
on.
climatic conditions requiring
pre-heating.
Wait until the warning lamp goes off before
operatingthestarter.
Presence of
water in the
Diesel lter
on and
accompanied by
a message in
thescreen.
waterintheDiesellter.
HavethelterbledbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualiedworkshopwithoutdelay.
Chapter7,"Checks"section.
Accordingtocountry.
Service
spanner
on.
that a service will be due
shortly.
Refertothelistofchecksinthemaintenanceand
warrantyguide.
Have the service carried out by a CITROËN
dealeroraqualiedworkshop.
Time ashing. adjustmentofthetime.
Usetheleft-handbuttonontheinstrumentpanel.
Chapter3,"Instrumentsandcontrols"section.
+
38
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
AdBlue
®
Formoreinformationonlling,refertothechapter7,AdBlue
®
section.
Alert Information Solution - action
1
st
level of alert
Thereisanaudiblesignalwhentheignitionisswitchedon.
The warnings are intermittent and then become
permanentwhenswitchingontheignitionorwhendriving.
The remaining driving range is counted down from
1500miles(2400km)to375miles(600km).
Therangegurereducesinstepsof200miles(300km).
The contents of the AdBlue
®
tankhasdroppedtoa
levelsufcientforarangeoflessthan1500miles
(2400km).
Havetheuidtopped-upusinganAdBlue
®
containerorbottles.
2
nd
level of alert
There is an audible signal when the ignition is
switchedon.
The warnings are intermittent (every 30 seconds)
and then become permanent every time the ignition
isswitchedonorwhendriving.
The remaining driving range is counted down from 350 miles
(600km)tozero,reducinginstepsof30miles(50km).
You must have the AdBlue
®
topped-up and not wait
forabreakdown.
In the display
screen.
Temporarydisplay:"NO START IN".
In the touch
screentablet.
Select:
- "Drivingassistance".
- "Diagnostic".
Thedrivingrangeisdisplayed.
3
rd
level of alert
The AdBlue
®
tankisempty.
Starting is impossible.
It is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue
®
additivetotheadditivetank.
+
+
39
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
SCR emissions control system
Alerts Information Solution - action
The UREA, Service and diagnostic warning lamps
come on, an SCR emissions control system fault
hasbeendetected.
This is is temporary fault, the alert disappears as
soon as the exhaust emissions return to normal
levels.
After 30 miles (50 km) without AdBlue
®
Conrmationofthefaultwhichisnotrelatedtoa
lackofuid.
Theremainingdrivingrange700miles
(1100km).
GotoaCITROËNdealeroraqualiedworkshop
assoonaspossibletoavoidabreakdown.
Thefaultisconrmed.
The next time the ignition is switched on, the
authorised driving range will be displayed in miles
(kilometres)andthealertwillberepeatedevery
30seconds.
The limit of the driving range has been reached,
exhaustemissionslevelsareabovethelimits.
Startingisimpossible.
To restart the engine, you must contact a
CITROËNdealeroraqualiedworkshop.
- BlueHDi Diesel
40
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
FUEL GAUGE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
The needle is positioned before the
red zone:normaloperation.
In arduous conditions of use or hot
climatic conditions, the needle may
moveclosetotheredgraduations.
What you should do if the needle
enters the red zone:
Reduce your speed or let the engine
runatidle.
What you should do if the warning
lamp comes on:
- stop immediately, switch off the
ignition.Thefanmaycontinueto
operate for a certain time, up to
approximately 10 minutes,
- wait for the engine to cool down in
ordertocheckthecoolantleveland
topitupifnecessary.
As the cooling system is pressurised,
follow the procedure below to avoid the
riskofscalding:
- wait at least one hour after
switching off the engine before
carryingoutanywork,
- unscrewthecapby1/4turnto
allow the pressure to drop,
- when the pressure has dropped,
checkthelevelintheheadertank,
- if necessary, remove the cap to
topup.
If the needle remains in the red
zone,havethesystemcheckedby
aCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshop.
Refertochapter7,"Levels"
section.
Refertochapter7,"Fuel"section.
The fuel level is tested each time the
keyisturnedtothe"running"position.
Thegaugeispositionedon:
- 1:thefueltankisfull,
approximately60litres.
- 0: the reserve is now being used,
the warning lamp comes on
continuously.Thereservewhen
thewarningrstcomesonis
approximately8litres.
41
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
EMISSIONS CONTROLS
EOBD (European On Board
Diagnosis) is a diagnostics
system which complies with,
among others, the standards
onemissionslimitsof:
- CO (carbon monoxide),
- HC (unburnt hydrocarbons),
- NOx (nitrogen oxides), detected
by oxygen sensors placed
downstream of the catalytic
converters,
- particles.
UNDER-INFLATION DETECTION
This system
continuously monitors
the pressures of the four
tyres, as soon as the
vehicleismoving.
A pressure sensor is located in the
valve of each tyre (except the spare
wheel).
The system triggers an alert if a drop
in pressure is detected in one or more
tyres.
Thetyreunder-inationdetection
system is an aid to driving which
does not replace the need for
vigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
The driver is warned of any
malfunction of this emissions
control system by the illumination
of this warning lamp in the instrument
panel.
If this warning lamp comes on, have
itcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualiedworkshop.
This system does not avoid the
needtocheckthetyrepressures
regularly (including the spare
wheel)andbeforealongjourney.
Drivingwithunder-inatedtyres
adversely affects road holding,
extendsbrakingdistancesandcauses
premature tyre wear, particularly under
arduous conditions (vehicle loaded,
highspeed,longjourney).
Drivingwithunder-inatedtyres
increasesfuelconsumption.
The tyre pressures for your vehicle
can be found on the tyre pressure
label.
Refertochapter9,"Identication
markings"section.
Thetyrepressuresmustbechecked
when the tyres cold (vehicle stopped
for 1 hour or after driving for less then
6miles(10km)atmoderatespeed).
Otherwise,add0.3bartothevalues
indicatedonthelabel.
42
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
The alert is maintained until
the tyre or tyres concerned is
reinated,repairedorreplaced.
The spare wheel (space-saver type or
asteelrim)doesnothaveasensor.
Operating faultUnder-inflation alert
The loss of pressure detected
does not always lead to visible
deformationofthetyre.Donotrely
onjustavisualcheck.
Thealertisgivenbythexed
illumination of this warning lamp,
accompanied by an audible signal,
and depending on equipment, the
displayofamessage.
Theashingandthen
xedilluminationofthe
under-inationwarning
lamp accompanied by the
illumination of the "Service" warning
lamp, and depending on equipment,
the display of a message indicates a
faultwiththesystem.
In this case, monitoring of the tyre
pressuresisnotassured.
In the event of a problem on one of
the tyres, the symbol or the message
appears, according to equipment, to
identifyit.
- Reduce speed, avoid sudden
steeringmovementsorharshbrake
applications.
- Stopassoonasitissafetodoso.
- In the event of a puncture, use
thetemporarypuncturerepairkit
or the spare wheel (according to
equipment),
or
- if you have a compressor, the one
in the temporary puncture repair
kitforexample,checkthefourtyre
pressures when cold,
or
- ifitisnotpossibletocheckthe
tyre pressures at the time, drive
carefullyatreducedspeed.
This alert is also displayed when
oneormorewheelsisnottted
with a sensor (for example, a
space-saverorsteelsparewheel).
GotoaCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshoptohavethesystemchecked
or, following the repair of a puncture, to
have the original wheel, equipped with
asensor,retted.
43
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
UNDER-INFLATION DETECTION WITH REINITIALISATION
Systemwhichautomaticallychecksthe
pressuresofthetyreswhiledriving.
The system monitors the pressures
in the four tyres, once the vehicle is
moving.
It compares the information given by
the four wheel speed sensors with
reference values, which must be
reinitialised every time the tyre
pressures are adjusted or a wheel
changed.
The system triggers an alert as soon
asitdetectsadropintheination
pressureofoneormoretyres.
Theunder-inationdetection
system does not replace the need
for vigilance on the part of the
driver.
This system does not avoid the need to
checkthetyrepressures(includingthe
spare wheel) every month as well as
beforealongjourney.
Drivingwithunder-inatedtyres
impairsroadholding,extendsbraking
distances and causes premature
tyre wear, particularly under arduous
condition (high loading, high speed,
longjourney).
Drivingwithunder-inatedtyres
increasesfuelconsumption.
Theinationpressuresdenedfor
your vehicle can be found on the
tyrepressurelabel.
For more information on the
identicationmarkings,refertothe
correspondingsection.
Tyrepressuresshouldbechecked
when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle
stoppedfor1hourorafterajourneyof
lessthan6miles(10km)atmoderate
speeds).
Otherwise(whenhot),add0.3barto
thepressuresshownonthelabel.
44
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Under-inflation alert
Thisisgivenbyxed
illumination of this warning lamp,
accompanied by an audible signal
and, depending on equipment,
thedisplayofamessage.
Before reinitialising the system,
ensure that the pressures of
the four tyres are correct for the
use of the vehicle and in line with the
recommendations on the tyre pressure
label.
Theunder-inationalertcanonly
be relied on if the reinitialisation of
the system has been done with the
pressures in the four tyres correctly
adjusted.
Theunder-inationdetectionsystem
does not give a warning if a pressure is
incorrectatthetimeofreinitialisation.
The loss of pressure detected
does not always cause visible
bulgingofthetyre.
Donotsatisfyyourselfwithjustavisual
check.
The alert is maintained until the
systemisreinitialised.
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid
excessive steering movements and
suddenbraking.
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safetodoso.
F If you have a compressor, such as
the one in the temporary puncture
repairkit,checkthepressuresof
thefourtyreswhencold.
F Ifitisnotpossibletomakethis
checkimmediately,drivecarefully
atreducedspeed.
or
F In the event of a puncture, use
thetemporarypuncturerepairkit
or the spare wheel (depending on
equipment).
Reinitialisation
It is necessary to reinitialise the system
every time one or more tyre pressures
areadjusted,andafterchangingone
ormorewheels.
45
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Reinitialisation of the system must be done with the ignition on and the vehicle
stationary:
- inthevehiclecongurationmenuforvehiclettedwithadisplayscreen,
- usingthebuttononthedashboard,forvehicleswithoutdisplayscreen.
Screen A
F Press the MENU button for access
tothemainmenu.
F Press the "5" or "6" button to
select the menu Veh cong, then
conrmbypressingtheOKbutton.
F Press the "5" or "6" button to
select the "Reinit inat", menu,
thenconrmbypressingtheOK
button.
Amessageisdisplayedtoconrm
theinstruction.
F ConrmbypressingtheOKbutton.
Screen C
F Press the MENU button for access
tothemainmenu.
F Press the "5" or "6" button to
select the "Personalisation-
conguration"menu,thenconrm
by pressing the OKbutton.
F Press the "5" or "6" button
to select the "Dene vehicle
parameters"menu,thenconrm
by pressing the OKbutton.
F Press the "5" or "6" button to
select the "Tyre pressures" menu,
then the "Reinitialisation" menu,
thenconrmingbypressingthe
OKbutton.
Amessageconrmsthe
reinitialisation.
Touch screen tablet
F Press the MENUbutton.
F Select the "Driving"menu.
F In the secondary page, select
"Under-ination initialisation".
Amessageisdisplayedtoconrmthe
reinitialisationinstruction.
F Select "Yes" or "No",thenconrm.
Amessageconrmsthereinitialisation.
46
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
The new pressure settings registered
are considered to be reference values
bythesystem.
Theunder-inationalertcanonly
be relied on if the system has
been reinitialised with all four tyres
inatedtothecorrectpressures.
Before doing anything to the
system, the pressures of the four
tyresmustbecheckedandthe
systemreinitialised.
Snow chains
The system does not have to be
reinitialisedafterttingorremoving
snowchains.
Dashboard button
F Makealongpressonthisbutton.
Ahightoneaudiblesignalconrmsthe
reinitialisation.
A low tone audible signal indicates that
thereinitialisationwasnotcompleted.
Operating fault
Theashingandthenxedillumination
oftheunder-inationwarninglamp
accompanied by illumination of the
Service warning lamp indicates a fault
withthesystem.
Inthiscase,under-inationmonitoring
ofthetyresisnolongerassured.
Havethesystemcheckedbya
CITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshop.
47
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
SERVICE INDICATOR
This programmes service intervals
accordingtotheuseofthevehicle.
More than 1 000 miles/km before the
next service is due
Example:4800miles/kmremain
beforethenextserviceisdue.When
the ignition is switched on and for a
fewseconds,thescreenshows:
A few seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the oil level is displayed
(depending on version), then the total
distance recorder resumes normal
operation showing the total and trip
distances.
Less than 1 000 miles/km before the
next service is due
Each time the ignition is switched on and for a few
seconds,thespannerashesandthenumberof
miles/kilometresremainingisdisplayed:
A few seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the oil level is displayed
(depending on version), then the total
distance recorder resumes normal
operationandthespannerremainson.
This indicates that a service should be
carriedoutshortly.
Service overdue
Operation
A few moments after the ignition
has been switched on, the spanner
indicating a service operation comes
on; the display for the total distance
recordergives(inroundgures)the
distance remaining before the next
service.
The points at which a service is due
are calculated from the last indicator
zeroreset.
The point at which a service is due is
determinedbytwoparameters:
- the distance travelled,
- the time which has elapsed since
thelastservice.
The distance remaining before the
next service may be weighted by
the time factor, depending on the
typeofdriving.
With the engine running the spanner
remains on until the service has been
carriedout.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, this
alertisalsoaccompaniedbythexed
illumination of the Service warning
lamp,onswitchingontheignition.
Each time the ignition is
switched on and for a few
seconds, the spanner
ashesandtheexcess
distanceisdisplayed.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the
spanner can also come on early,
according the level of deterioration
oftheengineoil.Deteriorationofthe
engine oil depends on the conditions of
useofthevehicle.
48
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Instruments and controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Trip recorder zero
reset button
After this operation, if you wish
todisconnectthebattery,lock
thevehicleandwaitforatleastve
minutes, otherwise the zero re-set will
notberegistered.
Engine oil level indicator
Depending on your vehicle's engine,
when the ignition is switched on,
the engine oil level is indicated for
a few seconds, after the service
information.
Oil level
correct
Low oil level
Flashing of "OIL",
linkedwiththe
service warning lamp,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the
screen, indicates a low oil level which
coulddamagetheengine.
Ifthelowoillevelisconrmedbya
checkusingthedipstick,itisessential
thatthelevelistoppedup.
Oil level gauge
fault
Flashing of "OIL--"
indicates a
malfunction of the
engineoillevelindicator.Contact
aCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshop.
The level read will only be correct
if the vehicle is on level ground
and the engine has been off for
morethan30minutes.
Dipstick
A = maximum, never exceed
this level as a surplus of oil
maydamagetheengine.
Contact a CITROËN dealer
oraqualiedworkshop
withoutdelay.
B = minimum, top up the level
viatheoilllercap,usingthe
grade of oil suited to your
engine.
Lighting dimmer
With the ignition on, press
the button until the zeros
appear.
With the lighting on,
press the button to vary
the brightness of the
instrumentsandcontrols.
When the lighting reaches
the minimum
(or maximum) setting, release the
button then press it again to increase
(orreduce)thebrightness.
As soon as the lighting is of the
requiredbrightness,releasethebutton.
Zero reset
YourCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshopcarriesoutthisoperation
aftereachservice.
However, if you carry out the service
yourself, the re-set procedure is as
follows:
- switch off the ignition,
- press and hold the trip recorder
reset button,
- switchontheignition.
Thedisplaybeginsacountdown.
When the display shows "=0", release
thebutton;thespannerdisappears.
49
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Gearbox and steering wheel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
MANUAL GEARBOX
5-speed
6-speed
To change gear easily, always depress
theclutchpedalfully.
To prevent the mat from becoming
caughtunderthepedal:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
andsecuredcorrectlyontheoor,
- nevertonematontopofanother.
When driving, avoid leaving your hand
onthegearknobastheforceexerted,
even if slight, may wear the internal
componentsofthegearboxovertime.
Changing into 5
th
or 6
th
gear
To engage the gear correctly, move the
gearleverfullytotheright.
Engaging reverse gear
The lever should be moved slowly
toreducenoise.
To engage reverse gear, wait until the
vehiclehascometoacompletestop.
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
When the vehicle is stationary,
releasethesteeringwheeladjustment
mechanismbypullingthelever.
Adjustthesteeringwheelforheight
andreach,thenlockthemechanismby
pushingtheleverfullyforward.
Inthe6-speedconguration,raisethe
collarbelowthegearknob.
50
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Gearbox and steering wheel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
The information appears
in the instrument panel
intheformofanarrow.It
may be accompanied by a
recommendedgear.
The system adapts its gear
change recommendation
according to the driving conditions
(slope,load,...)andthedemands
of the driver (power, acceleration,
braking,...).
Thesystemneversuggests:
- engagingrstgear,
- engagingreversegear.
With an electronic gearbox, the system
isonlyactiveinmanualmode.
GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR
Depending on the driving situation and
your vehicle's equipment, the system
mayadviseyoutoskipone(ormore)
gear(s).Youcanfollowthisinstruction
without engaging the intermediate
gears.
The gear engagement
recommendations must not be
consideredcompulsory.Thisis
becausethecongurationoftheroad,
thetrafcdensityandsafetyremain
determining factors when choosing
thebestgear.Therefore,thedriver
remains responsible for deciding
whether or not to follow the indications
given.
Thisfunctioncannotbedeactivated.
System which reduces fuel
consumption by recommending the
mostappropriategear.
51
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Gearbox and steering wheel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
6-SPEED ELECTRONIC GEARBOX
- automaticmode:gearselectorin
position A.
- manualmode:gearselectorin
position M.
Forsafety:
It is only possible to come out
of position Nifthebrakepedalis
pressed.
The change from position A (driving in
automatic mode) to position M (driving
in manual mode) or vice versa can be
madeatanytime.ThewarninglampA
goesoffintheinstrumentpanel.
Mode selection
Moving off
- To start the engine, the gear
selector must be in position N.
- Pressrmlyonthebrakepedal.
- Operatethestarter.
- When the engine is running, place
the gear selector on R, A or M as
desired.
- Releasethebrakepedaland
accelerate.
If the gear selector is not in position N,
and/orifthebrakepedalisnot
pressed,theenginewillnotstart.
Repeattheaboveprocedure.
Reverse gear
Engaging reverse gear
Move the gear selector to R.
Only attempt to select reverse gear
when the vehicle is stationary.
Neutral
Changing to neutral
Move the gear selector to N.Ifthe
vehicle is moving, do not select this
positionevenmomentarily.
52
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Gearbox and steering wheel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Acceleration
Foroptimumacceleration(e.g.to
overtakeanothervehicle),simply
press the pedal beyond the point of
resistance at the end of its travel, by
pressingdownrmly.
Vehicle stationary, with the
engine running
In the event of a prolonged stop with
the engine running, the gearbox
changes automatically to neutral N.
Stopping the vehicle
Before stopping the engine, put the
gear selector in position N.
In all cases, it is essential to apply
theparkingbrake.Checkthatthe
parkingbrakewarninglampisoninthe
instrumentpanel.
Before doing anything in the
enginecompartment,checkthat
the gear selector is in neutral N.
Changing gear
In situations of high engine speeds
(heavy acceleration), a change
up will not occur unless the driver
operates the electronic gearbox control
paddle.
Pull on the "+" control
paddletochangeup.
Pull on the "-" control
paddle to change
down.
- If the vehicle stops or reduces
speed (for example when
approaching a stop sign),
the gearbox changes down
automatically,torstgearif
needed.
- It is not necessary to release the
accelerator completely during gear
changes.
- A gear change instruction is
accepted only if the engine speed
permits.
- For safety reasons, depending on
the engine speed, a change down
maybeperformedautomatically.
Manual mode
Changing to manual mode
Move the gear selector to M.
Automatic mode
Changing to automatic
mode
Move the gear selector to A.
The gearbox then operates in
automatic mode, without any action on
yourpart.
It constantly selects the gear that is
bestsuitedtothefollowingconditions:
- driving style,
- roadprole,
- optimumfuelconsumption.
53
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Stop & Start
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
STOP & START
The Stop & Start system puts the
engine temporarily on standby - STOP
mode-duringstopsinthetrafc(red
lights,trafcjams,orother...).
The engine restarts automatically -
START mode - as soon as you want to
moveoff.
Therestarttakesplaceinstantly,
quicklyandsilently.
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start
system reduces fuel consumption and
exhaust emissions as well as the noise
levelwhenstationary.
Operation
Going into engine STOP mode
The "ECO" warning lamp
comes on in the instrument
panel and the engine goes
intostandby:
- with a manual gearbox, at speeds
below12mph(20km/h),whenyou
put the gear lever into neutral and
release the clutch pedal,
- with a 6-speed electronic
gearbox, at speeds below 5 mph
(8km/h),whenyoupressthebrake
pedal or put the gear lever into
position N.
Ifyourvehicleisttedwiththesystem,
a time counter calculates the sum of
the periods in STOP mode during a
journey.Itrestsitselftozeroeverytime
theignitionisswitchedonwiththekey.
With a 6-speed electronic
gearbox, for your comfort during
parkingmanoeuvres,STOPmode
is not available for a few seconds after
comingoutofreversegear.
STOP mode does not affect the
functionality of the vehicle, such as
braking,powersteering,forexample.
Never refuel with the engine in
STOP mode; you must switch off
theignitionwiththekey.
Special cases: STOP mode
unavailable
STOPmodeisnotinvokedwhen:
- the vehicle is on a steep slope
(rising or falling),
- the driver's door is open,
- the driver's seat belt is not
fastened,
- the vehicle has not exceeded
6mph(10km/h)sincethelast
enginestartusingthekey,
- the engine is needed to maintain
a comfortable temperature in the
passenger compartment,
- demisting is on,
- some special conditions (battery
charge, engine temperature,
brakingassistance,ambient
temperature...)wheretheengine
is needed to assure control of a
system.
In this case, the "ECO"
warninglampashesfora
fewseconds,thengoesoff.
This operation is perfectly normal.
54
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Stop & Start
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Going into engine START mode
The "ECO" warning lamp
goesoffandtheenginestarts:
- with a manual gearbox, when you
fully depress the clutch pedal,
- with a 6-speed electronic
gearbox:
● gearleverinpositionA or M,
whenyoureleasethebrake
pedal,
● orgearleverinpositionN and
thebrakepedalreleased,when
you move the gear lever to
position A or M,
● orwhenyouengagereverse
gear.
With a manual gearbox in STOP
mode, if a gear is engaged without
fully depressing the clutch pedal, a
warning lamp comes on or a message
isdisplayedaskingyoutodepressthe
clutchpedaltorestarttheengine.
Special cases: START invoked
automatically
For your safety and comfort, START is
invokedautomaticallywhen:
- you open the driver's door,
- you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
In this case the "ECO"
warninglampashesforfew
seconds,thengoesoff.
This operation is perfectly normal.
Deactivation
In certain circumstances, such as the need
to maintain a comfortable temperature in
the passenger compartment, it may be
preferabletodeactivateStop&Start.
At any time, press the "ECO
OFF" switch to deactivate the
system.
Thisisconrmedbytheswitchwarning
lamp coming on accompanied by a
messageinthescreen.
If the system has been deactivated
in STOP mode, the engine restarts
immediately.
Reactivation
Press the "ECO OFF"switchagain.
The system is active again; this is
conrmedbytheswitchwarning
lamp going off and a message in the
instrumentpanel.
The system is reactivated
automatically at every new start
usingthekey.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction
with the system, the "ECO
OFF" switch warning lamp
ashes,thencomeson
continuously.
Thissystemrequiresaspecic
batterywithaspecialspecication
and technology (reference
numbers available from a CITROËN
dealeroraqualiedworkshop).
Fitting a battery not listed by
CITROËNintroducestheriskof
malfunctionofthesystem.
haveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealer
oraqualiedworkshop.
In the event of a fault in STOP mode,
thevehiclemaystall.Allofthewarning
lamps in the instrument panel come
on.Itisthennecessarytoswitchoff
the ignition and start the engine again
usingthekey.
- the speed of the vehicle exceeds
15mph(25km/h)withamanual
gearboxor7mph(11km/h)with
the 6-speed electronic gearbox
system,
- some special conditions (battery
charge,enginetemperature,braking
assistance,ambienttemperature...)
where the engine is needed to
assurecontrolofasystem.
55
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Stop & Start
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
The Stop & Start system
requiresabatteryofspecic
characteristics.Allworkonthis
type of battery must be done only
byaCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshop.
For more information on the 12 V
battery,referto"Battery"insection8.
Good practice when stopping
Good practice when starting
Diesel pre-heating warning
lamp
If the temperature is high
enough, the warning lamp
comes on for less than
one second, you can start
withoutwaiting.
In cold weather, wait for this warning
lamp to go off then operate the starter
(Starting position) until the engine
starts.
Door or bonnet open
warning lamp
If this comes on, a door or the bonnet
isnotclosedcorrectly,check!
Minimise engine and gearbox wear
When switching off the ignition, let the
engine run for a few seconds to allow
the turbocharger (Diesel engine) to
returntoidle.
Do not press the accelerator when
switchingofftheignition.
There is no need to engage a gear
afterparkingthevehicle.
STARTING AND STOPPING
Running and accessories position.
Tounlockthesteering,turnthe
steering wheel gently while turning the
key,withoutforcing.Inthisposition,
certainaccessoriescanbeused.
Starting position.
The starter is operated, the engine
turnsover,releasethekey.
STOP position:steeringlock.
Theignitionisoff.Turnthesteering
wheeluntilthesteeringlocks.Remove
thekey.
Opening the bonnet
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start
systemtoavoidtheriskofinjury
related to an automatic change to
STARTmode.
Driving on ooded roads
Beforedrivingthroughaoodedroad,
it is strongly recommended that you
deactivatetheStop&Startsystem.
For more advice on driving, particularly
onoodedroads,refertothe
correspondingsection.
56
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Starting and switching off
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
HILL START ASSIST
This system (also called HHC - Hill
HolderControl),linkedtothedynamic
stabilitycontrolsystem,makeshill
starts easier and is activated in the
followingconditions:
- the vehicle must be stationary,
enginerunning,footonthebrake,
- the gradient of the road must be
steeper than 5%,
- uphill, the gearbox must be in
neutral or in a gear other than
reverse,
- downhill, reverse gear must be
engaged.
The Hill Start Assist system is a driving
aid.Itisnotanautomaticvehicle
parkingfunctionoranautomatic
parkingbrake.
Operation
Withthebrakepedalandclutchpedal
pressed, from the time you release
thebrakepedal,withoutusingthe
parkingbrake,youhaveapproximately
2 seconds to move off before the
vehiclestartstorollback.
During the moving off phase, the
function is deactivated automatically,
graduallyreleasingthebraking
pressure.Duringthisphase,the
characteristic noise of mechanical
releaseofthebrakesmaybeheard,
indicating the imminent movement of
thevehicle.
Operating fault
Hill start assist is deactivated in the
followingsituations:
- when the clutch pedal is released,
- whentheparkingbrakeisapplied,
- when the engine is switched off,
- whentheenginestalls.
If a malfunction of the
system occurs, this
warning lamp comes on
accompanied by an audible
signalandconrmedby
amessageinthescreen.Havethe
systemcheckedbyaCITROËNdealer
oraqualiedworkshop.
57
READY TO GO
3
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
Starting and switching off
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap03_Pret-a-partir_ed02-2016
DRIVING RECOMMENDATIONS
Observe the driving regulations and
remainvigilantwhateverthetrafc
conditions.
Paycloseattentiontothetrafcand
keepyourhandsonthewheelsothat
you are ready to react at any time to
anyeventuality.
As a safety precaution, the driver
must only carry out actions requiring
sustained attention when the vehicle is
stationary.
Onalongjourney,abreakevery
twohoursisstronglyrecommended.
Indifcultweather,drivesmoothly,
anticipatetheneedtobrakeand
increase the distance from other
vehicles.
Driving on flooded roads
We strongly advise against driving
onoodedroads,asthiscouldcause
serious damage to the engine or
gearbox, as well as to the electrical
systemsofyourvehicle.
If you are obliged to drive through
water:
- checkthatthedepthofwaterdoes
notexceed15cm,takingaccount
of waves that might be generated
by other users,
- deactivate the Stop & Start system,
- drive as slowly as possible without
stalling.Inallcases,donotexceed
6mph(10km/h),
- do not stop and do not switch off
theengine.
Onleavingtheoodedroad,assoon
ascircumstancesallow,makeseveral
lightbrakeapplicationstodrythebrake
discsandpads.
If in doubt on the state of your vehicle,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshop.
Neverdrivewiththeparkingbrake
applied-Riskofoverheatingand
damagetothebrakingsystem!
Riskofre!
As the exhaust system of your vehicle
is very hot, even several minutes
after switching off the engine, do not
parkorleavetheenginerunningover
areaswhereinammablesubstances
andmaterialsarepresent:grass,
leaves,etc.
Never leave a vehicle
unsupervised with the engine
running.Ifyouhavetoleave
your vehicle with the engine running,
applytheparkingbrakeandputthe
gearbox into neutral or position N or P,
dependingonthetypeofgearbox.
Important!
58
Steering mounted controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
DIRECTION INDICATORS
"Motorway" function
Pressthecontrolupordowntoash
the corresponding direction indicator
threetimes.
LIGHTING
Left:downwardspassingthe
pointofresistance.
Right:upwardspassingthe
pointofresistance.
Front and rear lighting
Lighting off
Automatic illumination of
headlamps
Sidelamps
Dipped beam (green)
Dipped beam/main beam change
Pullthestalkfullytowardsyou.
Lighting-on audible warning
On switching off the ignition, all of the
lamps turn off, except dipped beam if
automatic guide-me-home lighting has
beenactivated.
Checkingbymeansoftheindicator
lamps in the instrument panel is
described in the "Instruments and
controls"sectionofchapter3.
Direction indicators
Selection is by turning this
ring.
Main beam (blue)
To activate the lighting
control, turn this ring to
the lighting off position "0"
then to the selection of
yourchoice.
On opening the driver's door, there is
an audible warning if you have left the
lightingon.
59
Steering mounted controls
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
LED DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
Rear foglamps (amber,
2nd rotation of the ring
forwards).
Front foglamps (green,
1st rotation of the ring
forwards).
Rotate this ring forwards
to switch on and
rearwardstoswitchoff.
Theirstateisconrmedby
the warning lamps in the
instrumentpanel.
Do not forget to switch them off
whentheyarenolongerneeded.
Operation of the automatic illumination
of headlamps switches off the rear
foglamps, but the front foglamps
remainon.
To switch off the front and
rear foglamps, turn the
ring rearwards twice in
succession.
Automatic illumination of headlamps
In foggy weather or in snow,
the sunshine sensor may detect
sufcientlight.
As a consequence, the lighting
willnotcomeonautomatically.If
necessary, you must switch on
thedippedbeamheadlampsmanually.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor
located on the windscreen, behind
themirror.Itisusedfortheautomatic
illumination of headlamps and for the
automaticrainsensitivewipers.
Activation
The sidelamps
and dipped beam
headlamps switch
on automatically if
the light is poor, or
during operation of the windscreen
wipers.Theyswitchoffassoonasthe
light becomes bright enough or the
windscreenwipersstop.
On starting the vehicle, in daylight the
LED daytime running lamps come on
automatically.
If the sidelamps and headlamps are
switched on manually or automatically,
thedaytimerunninglampsgooff.
Programming
For countries where exterior lighting by
day is not a legal requirement, you can
activate or deactivate the function via
thecongurationmenu.
If the user does not operate any
equipment for 30 minutes, the
Economy mode engages to avoid
dischargingthebattery.Electrical
functions are put on standby and the
batterywarninglampashes.
Sidelamp operation is not affected by
Economymode.
In clear weather or in rain, both day
and night, rear foglamps dazzle and
theiruseisprohibited.
Refer to chapter 8, "Battery
section".
Front and rear foglamps
They operate with the sidelamps and
dippedbeamheadlamps.
Turn the ring to the AUTOposition.
The activation of this function is
accompanied by a message in the
screen.
Deactivation
Turntheringforwardsorrearwards.
The deactivation of this function is
accompanied by a message in the
screen.
This function is not compatible with
daytimerunninglamps.
60
Steering mounted controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
If the sunshine sensor
does not function correctly,
the lighting comes on
accompanied by the service
warning lamp, an audible
signalandamessageinthescreen.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshop.
Guide-me-home lighting
Keeping the dipped beam headlamps
on temporarily with the ignition off,
makesthedriver'sexiteasierwhenthe
lightispoor.
HEADLAMP BEAM
Thebeamsettingmustbeadjustedto
suittheloadinthevehicle.
0 -Noload.
1 -Partialload.
2 -Averageload.
3 -Maximumauthorisedload.
Manual operation
- Withtheignitionoff,"ash"the
headlamps within one minute after
switchingofftheignition.
The guide-me-home lighting switches
offautomaticallyafterasettime.
Automatic operation
Refer to chapter 10, "Screen
menumap"section.
Initial setting is position 0.
Activate the function via the
vehiclecongurationmenu.
Programming
The system is activated or deactivated
inthevehiclecongurationmenu.
Thesystemisactivatedbydefault.
Switching off
Thesystemdoesnotoperate:
- below a certain angle of rotation of
the steering wheel,
- above25mph(40km/h),
- whenreversegearisengaged.
Switching on
Thisfunctionstarts:
- when the corresponding direction
indicator is switched on,
or
- from a certain angle of rotation of
thesteeringwheel.
With dipped or main beam headlamps,
thisfunctionmakesuseofthebeam
from a front foglamp to illuminate the
inside of a bend, when the vehicle
speed is below 25 mph (approximately
40km/h)(urbandriving,windingroad,
intersections,parkingmanoeuvres...).
CORNERING LIGHTING
Travelling abroad
If using your vehicle in a country
that drives on the other side of the
road,theheadlampsmustbeadjusted
toavoiddazzlingon-comingdrivers.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshop.
The function is deactivated temporarily
when you use the manual lighting
controlstalk.
61
Steering mounted controls
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
2 Fastwipe(heavyrain).
1 Normalwipe(moderaterain).
l Intermittentwipe.
0 Off.
â Single wipe
(pressdownwards).
In the Intermittent position, the wiping
speed is in proportion to the vehicle
speed.
WIPERS
Manual wiping
Whenever the ignition has been
switched off for more than one minute,
withthewindscreenwiperstalkin
position2,1orI,thestalkmustbe
reactivated.
- Movethestalktoanyposition.
- Returnittothedesiredposition.
Do not cover the rain sensor,
located in the centre of the
windscreen,behindthemirror.
Activation
Pressthecontroldownwards.
Activation of the function is
accompanied by a message in the
screen.
Deactivation
Placethewindscreenwipersstalkin
position I, 1 or 2.
Deactivation of the function is
accompanied by a message in the
screen.
In the event of malfunction of the
automatic windscreen wipers, the
windscreen wipers will operate in
intermittentmode.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshoptohavethesystem
checked.
In the AUTO position, the windscreen
wipers operate automatically and
adapt their speed to the intensity of the
rainfall.
When not in AUTO mode, for the
other positions, refer to the manual
windscreenwiperssection.
The automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers function must
bereactivatedbypressingthestalk
downwards, if the ignition has been
switchedoffformorethanoneminute.
When using an automatic car
wash, switch off the ignition to
avoid triggering the automatic
wiping.
In winter, it is advisable to wait for the
windscreen to completely clear of ice
beforeoperatingtheautomaticwipers.
Automatic wipers
62
Steering mounted controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Screenwash
Pullthestalktowardsyou,thewash-
wipe is accompanied by a timed sweep
ofthewipers.
Turntheringpasttherst
position:therearscreenwash
then the rear wiper operates
foraxedtime.
In winter, in the event of a
considerable amount of snow
or ice, switch on the heated
rearscreen.Oncethescreenis
clear, remove the snow or ice which
has accumulated on the rear wiper
blade.Youcanthenoperatetherear
windscreenwiper.
To top up the level, refer to the
"Levels"sectionofchapter7.
Special position of the
windscreen wipers
In the minute following switching
off of the ignition, any action on the
stalkpositionsthewipersagainstthe
windscreenuprights.
This action enables you to position
thewiperbladesforwinterparking,
cleaningorreplacement.
Refer to the "Changing a windscreen
wiperblade"sectionofchapter8.
Toparkthewipersintheirnormal
position after this has been done,
switch on the ignition and move the
stalk.
Turntheringtotherst
position.
Rear wiper Rear screenwash
63
Steering mounted controls
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
TRIP COMPUTER
A few definitions
Range: displays the distance which
can travelled with the remaining fuel
detectedinthetank,basdonthe
average consumption over the last few
miles(kilometres).
This displayed value may vary
signicantlyfollowingachangeinthe
vehiclespeedorthereliefoftheroute.
Current fuel consumption: only
calculated and displayed above
20mph(30km/h).
Average fuel consumption: this is the
average fuel consumption since the
lasttripcomputerzeroreset.
Distance travelled: calculated since
thelasttripcomputerzeroreset.
Distance remaining to the
destination: calculated with reference to
thenaldestination,enteredbytheuser.
If guidance is activated, the navigation
systemcalculatesitasacurrentvalue.
Average speed: this is the average
speed calculated since the last trip
computerzeroreset(ignitionon).
Each press of the button, located at
theendofthewiperstalk,displaysthe
different trip computer information in
turn,dependingonthescreen.
When the required trip is displayed,
press the control for more than
twoseconds.
When the range falls below 20 miles
(30km),dashesaredisplayed.After
llingwithatleast10litresoffuel,the
range is recalculated and is displayed
whenitexceeds60miles(100km).
If, whilst driving, dashes are displayed
continuously in place of the digits,
contactaCITROËNdealer.
The "vehicle" tab with the range,
current fuel consumption and the
remainingdistancetorun.
The "1" tab (trip 1) with the average
speed, the average fuel consumption
and the distance travelled in trip "1".
The "2" tab (trip 2) with the same
information for a 2
nd
trip.
Reset
64
Steering mounted controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
CRUISE CONTROL
"CRUISE"
"This is the speed at which the driver
wishestodrive".
Thisaidtodrivinginfree-owing
trafcenablesthevehicletomaintain
the speed programmed by the driver,
unlessasteepgradientmakesthis
impossible.
For the system to be programmed or
activated, the vehicle speed must be
greaterthan25mph(40km/h)with
4thgearorhigherengaged.
The state of the cruise control system
can be seen in the instrument panel
together with the the programmed
speedsetting.
Function selected,
display of the "Cruise
Control"symbol.
Function off,
OFF
Functionon.
Vehicle speed above,
the programmed
speedashes.
Operating fault
detected,
OFF - the dashes
ash.
1. CruisecontrolmodeOn/Off.
2. Reducecruisespeedsetting.
3. Increasecruisespeedsetting.
4. Pause/Resumecruisecontrol.
65
Steering mounted controls
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Selecting the function
First activation /
Programming a
speed
Temporarily exceeding the
speed setting
Deactivation (off)
- Press this button or
thebrakeorclutch
pedal.
Reactivation
- Following deactivation of the cruise
control,pressthisbutton.
Your vehicle will return to the last
programmedspeed.
Alternatively,youcanrepeatthe"rst
activation"procedure.
It is possible to accelerate and drive
momentarily at a speed greater than
theprogrammedspeedsetting.The
valueprogrammedashes.
When the accelerator pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the
programmedspeed.
- Reach the chosen speed by
pressingtheaccelerator.
- Press the SET - or SET +button.
Thisprogrammes/activatesthespeed
setting and the vehicle will maintain
thisspeed.
- Place the switch in the CRUISE
position.Thecruisecontrolis
selected but is not yet active and
nospeedhasbeenprogrammed.
66
Steering mounted controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Changing the
programmed speed
Switching the system off
Operating fault
Cancelling the programmed
speed setting
When the vehicle becomes stationary,
after switching off the ignition, the
systemnolongermemorisesaspeed.
There are two methods of memorising
a speed higherthanthepreviousone:
- Place the dial in position 0 or switch
off the ignition to switch everything
off.
Good practice
Without using the accelerator
- Press the SET +button.
Abriefpressincreasesthespeedby1mph(km/h).
A maintained press increases the speed in
stepsof5mph(km/h).
Using the accelerator
- Exceed the memorised speed until
the speed required is reached,
- Press the SET + or SET -button.
To memorise a speed lower than the
previousone:
- Press the SET -button.
A brief press decreases the speed by
1mph(km/h).
A maintained press decreases the
speedinstepsof5mph(km/h).
The programmed speed setting is
clearedandreplacedbythreedashes.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshoptohavethesystem
checked.
When changing the programmed
speed setting by means of a
maintained press, pay attention as
the speed can increase or decrease
rapidly.
Do not use the cruise control on
slipperyroadsorinheavytrafc.
In the event of a steep slope, the cruise
control cannot prevent the vehicle from
exceeding the programmed speed
setting.
In any event, the cruise control cannot
replace the need to observe the speed
limits and the need for vigilance on the
partofthedriver.
Itisadvisabletokeepyourfeetnear
thepedals.
Toavoidanyjammingunderthe
pedals:
- ensurethatthematanditsxings
ontheoorarepositionedcorrectly,
- never place one mat on top of
another.
67
Steering mounted controls
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
The speed of the vehicle responds to
the pressure of the driver's foot, up
to the the accelerator pedal's point of
resistance, which indicates that the
programmedspeedhasbeenreached.
However, pressing the pedal beyond
thispointofresistancetotheoor
allows the programmed speed to be
exceeded.Toresumeuseofthelimiter,
simply reduce the pressure on the
accelerator pedal gradually and return
toaspeedbelowthatprogrammed.
Adjustments can be carried out
when stationary, with the engine
running, or with the vehicle moving.
This speed limiter shows the function
selection status in the instrument panel
anddisplaystheprogrammedspeed:
SPEED LIMITER
"LIMIT"
Function selected,
displaying of the
"Speed Limiter"
symbol.
Function off,
last programmed
speed - OFF.
Functionon.
Vehicle speed above,
the programmed
speed setting is
displayedashing.
Operating fault
detected,
OFF - the dashes
ash.
1. LimitermodeOn/Off.
2. Reduce programmed speed
setting.
3. Increase programmed speed
setting.
4. SpeedlimiterOn/Pause.
"This is the selected speed which the
driverdoesnotwishtoexceed".
This selection is made with the engine
running while stationary or with the vehicle
moving.Theminimumspeedwhichcan
beprogrammedis20mph(30km/h).
68
Steering mounted controls
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Selecting the function
Programming a speed setting On / Off
- Place the switch in the LIMIT
position.Thelimiterisselected
butisnotyetactive.Thescreen
indicates the last programmed
speedsetting.
A speed can be programmed without
activating the limiter but with the
enginerunning.
To memorise a speed higher than the
previousone:
- Press the SET +button.
Abriefpressincreasesthespeedby1mph(km/h).
A maintained press increases the speed in steps of
5mph(km/h).
To memorise a speed lower than the
previousone.
- Press the SET -button.
Abriefpressdecreasesthespeedby1mph(km/h).
A maintained press decreases the speed in steps of
5mph(km/h).
Pressing this button once activates
the limiter, pressing the button again
deactivates it (OFF).
69
Steering mounted controls
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Exceeding the programmed
speed
Switching the function off
Operating fault
The programmed speed is cleared
thenreplacedbythreedashes.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshoptohavethesystem
checked.
Flashing of the speed setting
Good practice
In any event, the speed limiter cannot
replace the need to observe speed
limits, nor can it replace the need for
vigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
Alwayspayattentiontotheprole
of the road and sharp acceleration
and stay in complete control of your
vehicle.
Toavoidanyjammingunderthe
pedals:
- ensurethatthematanditsxings
ontheoorarepositionedcorrectly,
- never place one mat on top of
another.
Pressing the accelerator pedal in order
to exceed the programmed speed
will have no effect unless you press
the pedal rmly beyond the point of
resistance.
The limiter is deactivated temporarily
andtheprogrammedspeedashes
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignal.
To return to the limiter function, reduce
your speed to below the programmed
speed.
Thespeedsettingashes:
- following forcing of the accelerator
point of resistance,
- when the limiter cannot prevent an
increase in the vehicle speed due
totheproleoftheroadorona
steep descent,
- intheeventofsharpacceleration.
- Place the switch in position 0 or
switch off the ignition to switch the
systemoff.
The last programmed speed remains in
thememory.
70
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Ventilation
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
VENTILATION
the side vents and the central
vents,
Air flow
the footwells,
the windscreen and the footwells,
thewindscreen.
The air distribution can be
modulated by placing the
control in the intermediate
positions,marked"●".
Air distribution
The air supply distribution is
determinedbythefollowingsymbols:
in the red zone, provides
heating of the passenger
compartment.
in the blue zone, provides
ambient air,
The speed of the blown air at
the vents varies from 1 to the
fastest4.Position0switches
itoff.
Adjustthiscontrolinorder
to attain the desired comfort
level.
Heating Manual air conditioning
Temperature
Controlpositioned:
71
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Ventilation
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Intake of exterior air
Recirculation of interior air
Air conditioning A/C
The LED in the button is
off.Thisisthepreferred
operatingposition.
Pressing the button starts
the air conditioning system,
theLEDison.Pressingthe
button again switches the
function off and the LED
goesoff.
The air conditioning does not operate if
thefanspeedissetto0.
The air conditioning can only operate
withtheenginerunning.
TheLEDinthebuttonison.
Recirculation temporarily
prevents exterior odours
andsmokefromenteringthe
passengercompartment.
Used with the setting of the fan speed
(from 1 to 4), recirculation enables you
to attain the desired comfort level more
quicklywithbothhotorcoldsettings.
Thispositionshouldonlybetemporary.
When your desired comfort level has
beenreached,returntotheintake
of exterior air position to permit
renewal of the air in the passenger
compartmentandavoidmisting.Thisis
thepreferredoperatingmode.
72
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Ventilation
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Good practice
For maximum cooling or heating of the
passenger compartment, it is possible
to exceed the value 15 by turning until
LOisdisplayedorthevalue27by
turninguntilHIisdisplayed.
On entering the vehicle, the inside
temperature may be much colder
(orwarmer)thaniscomfortable.There
is no advantage in changing the value
displayedinordertoquicklyreachthe
levelofcomfortrequired.Thesystem
will use its maximum performance to
reachthecomfortvalueset.
DIGITAL AIR CONDITIONING
Automatic operation
AUTO comfort programme
This is the normal air conditioning
systemoperatingmode.
Driver or passenger side comfort
value
The value indicated in the screen
corresponds to a level of comfort and
not a temperature in degrees Celsius
orFahrenheit.
Turn this control to the left
or to the right to decrease or
increasethevalue.Asetting
around the value 21 provides
optimumcomfort.However,
depending on your requirements, a
settingbetween18and24isusual.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor
locatedonthedashboard.
Press this button, the AUTO
symbolisdisplayed.
The system controls the
distribution,theowandthe
intakeofairtoguarantee
comfortandasufcientcirculation
of air in the passenger compartment
accordingtothecomfortvalueset.No
furtheractiononyourpartisrequired.
Airowwillincreasegraduallywhen
the engine is cold, to prevent excessive
distributionofcoldair.
For your comfort, the settings are
stored when the ignition is switched off
and are reinstated the next time the
vehicleisstarted.
The automatic function will no longer
be maintained if you change a setting
manually(AUTOiscleared).
SEPARATE SETTINGS FOR DRIVER AND PASSENGER
73
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Ventilation
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Manual operation
You can, according to your
requirements,makeadifferentselection
from that offered by the system by
changingasetting.Theotherfunctions
willstillbecontrolledautomatically.
Pressing the AUTO button restores fully
automaticoperation.
Air distribution
Pressing this button several
times in succession directs
theairowtowards:
- the windscreen,
- the windscreen and footwells,
- the footwells,
- the side vents, central vents and
footwells,
- thesideventsandcentralvents.
Air ow
Press the small fan button to
reducetheoworthelarge
fan button to increase the
ow.
Onthedisplay,thebladesofthefanll
whentheowisincreased.
Switching the air
conditioning On / Off
Press this button, the A/C
symbol is displayed and the
airconditioningisactivated.
Deactivating the system
Presstheairowsmall fan
button until the fan
symbol disappears from the
display.
This action deactivates all of the
system's functions, with the exception
of the air recirculation and rear screen
demisting(ifttedonyourvehicle).
Your comfort setting is no longer
maintainedandisswitchedoff.
Intake of exterior air /
Recirculation of interior air
Press this button to
recirculatetheinteriorair.
The recirculation symbol is
displayed.
Pressing the large fan
button or the AUTO button
reactivates the system with
the values set before it was
deactivated.
Recirculation prevents exterior odours
andsmokefromenteringthepassenger
compartment.Avoidprolongedoperation
ininteriorairrecirculationmode(riskof
condensation,odourandhumidity).
Pressing this button again activates the
intakeofexteriorair.
Pressing this button again switches off
theairconditioning.
The ventilation outlet, located
in the glove box, diffuses cool
air (if the air conditioning is
on) regardless of the reference
temperature requested in the
passenger compartment and
regardlessoftheexteriortemperature.
For your comfort, do not deactivate the
systemforlongperiods.
74
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Ventilation
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Recommended settings for air conditioning
If I require... Air distribution Temperature Air ow Air recirculation A/C
Heating -
Cooling
Demisting
Defrosting
With automatic digital air conditioning, operation in AUTO mode is recommended,
irrespectiveoftherequirement.
Remembertoswitchitoffwhentheambientairsuitsyourrequirements.
75
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Ventilation
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
DEMISTING AND DEFROSTING
Manual mode
Turn the control to this
temperaturesetting.
Increasetheairowsetting.
Presstheairconditioningbutton.
Returning to exterior air
intakeopenpermitsrenewal
of the air in the passenger
compartment(LEDoff).
Turn the control to this air
distributionsetting.
Demisting the rear screen and/
or mirrors
Pressing this button, with the
engine running, activates the
rapid demisting - defrosting of
therearscreenand/orelectric
mirrors.
Thisfunctionswitchesoff:
- when the button is pressed,
- when the engine is switched off,
- automatically to prevent excessive
energyconsumption.
76
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Ventilation
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
DEMISTING AND DEFROSTING
GOOD PRACTICE
Vents
"Leave them open"
For optimum distribution and diffusion
of hot or cool air in the passenger
compartment,thereareadjustable
central and side vents which can
be directed sideways (right or left)
orvertically(upordown).Foryour
comfort while driving, do not close
themanddirecttheowofairtowards
thewindowsinstead.
Air vents in the footwells and directed
towards the windscreen complete the
equipment.
Donotblocktheventslocatedatthe
windscreen or the air extractor located
intheboot.
Dust filter, odour filter
(activated carbon)
Thisltertrapscertaindustandlimits
odours.
Ensurethatthislterisingood
conditionandhaveallofthelter
elementsreplacedregularly.
Refertothe"Checks"sectionof
chapter7.
Air conditioning
In all seasons, the air conditioning
should only be used with the
windowsclosed.However,ifthe
interior temperature remains high
afteraprolongedperiodparkedin
thesun,rstventilatethepassenger
compartmentforafewminutes.
Use the AUTO mode as much as
possible as it permits optimised
controlofallofthefunctions:airow,
passenger compartment comfort
temperature, air distribution, air
intakemodeorairrecirculationinthe
passengercompartment.
Operate the air conditioning system for
5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month,
tokeepitingoodworkingorder.
If the system does not produce cold air,
do not use it and contact a CITROËN
dealeroraqualiedworkshop.
Automatic mode: visibility
programme
The comfort programme (AUTO) may
notbesufcienttoquicklydemistor
defrost the windows (humidity, several
passengers,ice).
In this case, select the visibility
programme.Thevisibilityprogramme
indicatorcomeson.
It activates the air conditioning, the air
owandprovidesoptimumdistribution
of the ventilation to the windscreen and
sidewindows.
Itdeactivatestheairrecirculation.
It is normal that the condensation
created by the air conditioning system
resultsinaowofwaterwhichmay
form a puddle under the vehicle when
parked.
77
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
FRONT SEATS
Forwards/backwards Seat height (driver)
To raise the seat, pull the control
upwardsthentakeyourweightoffthe
seatcushion.
To lower the seat, pull the control
upwards then push on the seat
cushion.
Seat backrest angle
Lift the bar and slide the seat forwards
orbackwards.
Thefollowingadjustmentsare
available:
Withyourbackpressedagainstthe
seatbackrest,movetheleverforwards
andsettherequiredangle.
78
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Never drive with the head
restraints removed; they must be
inplaceandcorrectlyadjusted.
Adjustable armrest
Front heated seats control
Eachfrontseatmaybettedwitha
control located on the side part of the
cushion.
Presstoswitchonthecushionheating.
Pressagaintoswitchitoff.
Head restraint height
To raise the head restraint, slide it vertically
upwards.
To lower the head restraint, press the
button and slide the head restraint
verticallydownwards.
Theadjustmentiscorrectwhentheupper
edge of the head restraint is level with the
topofthehead.
To remove the head restraint, press the
buttonandpulltheheadrestraintupwards.
To re-install the head restraint, engage
therodsintheholesmakingsuretheyare
alignedwiththeseatback.
To access the vertical position, raise
thearmrestuntilitlocks.
Lower the armrest to return it to a
positionforuse.
To remove the armrest, press the
release button from the vertical position
andmoveasidethearmrest.
Toputthearmrestbackinplace,clipit
intheverticalposition.
Ifthevehicleisttedwiththeadditional
console and an armrest, to fold the
passenger seat to the table position
removetheconsoleorthearmrest.
79
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
REAR BENCH SEAT
Each1/3-2/3sectioncanbefully
folded,thenremovedindividually.
Head restraint
The1/3-2/3splitrearbenchseatistted
with"comma"shapeheadrestraints.
Highposition:liftandraisethehead
restraint.
Lowposition:pressonthehead
restrainttolowerit.
To remove the head restraint, after
raising it press the tab and lift the head
restraint.
To install the head restraint, engage
the rods of the head restraint in the
holeskeepingitinlinewiththeseat
back.
80
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Fully folded position
Example of operations for the
1/3section.Theyareidenticalforthe
2/3section.
- Raise the grey control bar, located
attherearoftheseatcushion.
- Tilttheentireseatforward.
Putting back in place
Checkthattheseatislocked
ontheoorsecurelywhenitis
returnedtothesittingposition.
- Place the head restraints in the low
position.
- If necessary, move the front seats
forward.
- Press the grey control located on
theupperpartoftheseatbackrest.
- Foldtheseatbackrestontothe
seatcushion.
Tilt the entire seat rearwards until it
locksintoplace.
Raisetheseatbackrest.
Theseatislockedcorrectlywhenthe
control(atthetopoftheseatback)is
nolongervisible.
81
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Removing the bench seat Refitting the bench seat
Refer to the "Fully folded position",
describedpreviously.
To return the bench seat
(1/3sectionand/or2/3section)to
the "passenger carrying" position,
refer to the "Fully folded position"
describedpreviously.
- Tilt the entire seat rearwards by
approximately45°.
- Lift the bench seat vertically to the
limitoftheanchorages.
- Straighten bench seat by tilting it
forwardsthenliftit.
- If necessary, move the front seats
forward.
-
Placethebenchseat(1/3sectionand/or
2/3section)inthefullyfoldedposition.
- Offerupthebenchseat(1/3section
and/or2/3section)vertically.
- Placethehooksbetweenthe
twobars.
- Foldthebenchseatrearwards.
82
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
REAR SEATS (5 SEAT VERSION)
Head restraint
Eachseatcanberemovedindividually.
Each time a seat is returned to the
sitting position or after removing then
rettingaseat,checkthatitislocked
ontheoorsecurely.
The three independent rear seats
arettedwith"comma"shapehead
restraints.
Thebackofthecentreseat,foldedonto
the seat cushion, has a shell which
servesasatablewithcupholder.
Highposition:liftandraisethehead
restraint.
Lowposition:pressonthehead
restrainttolowerit.
To remove the head restraint, after
raising it press the tab and lift the head
restraint.
To install the head restraint, engage
the rods of the head restraint in the
holeskeepingitinlinewiththeseat
back.
83
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
Placing the seat back in the
table position
Returning the seat back to the sitting position
Placing the seat in the fully
folded position
Returning the seat to its original position
- Operatethecontrolandadjustthe
angleoftheseatbackrest.
- Pullthecontroltofoldtheseatback
ontotheseatcushion.
Donotplacehardorheavyobjects
onthetable.Theycouldbecome
dangerousprojectilesintheeventof
sharpbrakingorimpact.
- Releasetheseatbackbypulling
the control, then return it to its
originalposition.
Whenreturningtheseatbackrestto
the sitting position, ensure that it is
lockedsecurely.
- Pull the control to place the seat
backinthetableposition.
- Raise the bar located behind the
seat to release the rear anchoring
points.
- Tilt the entire seat forwards, until it
locks.
- Pushtheredcontrol.
- Foldbacktheseattoxtherear
anchoringpoints.
- Raisetheseatbackrestbypulling
thecontrol.
- Checkthattheseathascorrectly
lockedintoplace.
Beforeunfoldingtheseat,check
thatnoobjectisobstructingthe
anchorage points or preventing
correctlockingoftheseats.
84
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Removing the seat
- If necessary, move the front
seats forward and lower the head
restraint.
- Place the seat in the fully folded
position.
Good practice
Followingthevariousoperations:
- do not remove a head restraint
withoutstoringitandxittoa
support,
- ensure that the passengers can
always access the seat belts and
fasten them easily,
- passengersmustnevertake
theirseatwithoutadjustingand
fasteningtheirseatbelt.
Refer to the "Fully folded position"
describedpreviously.
- Press the red lever to release the
frontfeet.
- Tilt the entire seat rearwards by
approximately 45° without releasing
thelever.
- Releasethelever.
- Lift the seat vertically to the limit of
theanchorages.
- Straighten the seat by tilting it
forwardsthenliftit.
Refitting the seat
- Tilttheseatforwardby45°.
- Placethehooksbetweenthetwo
bars.
- Foldbacktheseattoxtherear
anchoringpoints.
- Pull the control to return the seat
backtoitsinitialposition.
- Raisetheheadrestraint.
Beforeunfoldingtheseat,check
thatnoobjectisobstructingthe
anchorage points or preventing
correctlockingoftheseats.
85
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Head restraint
Thisisofthe"comma"shapetype.
Highposition:pressthetab,liftand
raisetheheadrestraint.
Lowposition:pushthetabandpress
thetopoftheheadrestrainttolowerit.
Toremovetheheadrestraint:placeitin
thehighposition,liftit,thenremoveit.
Store it inside the vehicle, securing it
rmly.
Toinstalltheheadrestraint:engage
the rods of the head restraint in the
holeskeepingitinlinewiththeseat
back.
Each seat can be removed and must
bereplacedinthespeciedposition,
indicatedbyasymbolonitslabel.
The seats of row 2 and row 3 are
independentandadjustable.
REAR SEATS (7 SEAT VERSION)
86
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Left-hand outer seat
Types of Row 2 seat
Types of Row 3 seat
Centre seat Right-hand outer seat
Right-hand outer seatLeft-hand outer seat
87
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
- Operatethecontrolandadjustthe
angle.
Placing the seat backrest in the
table position
- Lowertheheadrestraintfully.
- Operate the control to fold the seat
backontotheseatcushion.
Returning the seat backrest to the
sitting position
- Releasetheseatbackrestby
pulling the control, then return it to
itsoriginalposition.
- Ensurethatithascorrectlylocked
intoplace.
Placing the seat in the fully folded
position
- Placetheseatinthetableposition.
- Pull the red strap, located behind
the seat, to release the feet of the
seat from their anchorage on the
oor.
- Tilttheentireseatforwards.
Row 2 seat adjustments
Returning the seat to its original
position
- Unfoldtheentireseat.
Before folding the seat, ensure
that:
- in row 3, no passenger's
foot is at one of the seat
anchoragesontheoor,
- theseatislockedsecurelyon
theoor,
- the seat belt is available for
thepassenger.
88
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Row 3 seat adjustments
Placing the seat backrest in the
table position
- Lowertheheadrestraintfully.
- Operate the control to fold the seat
backrestontotheseatcushion.
Returning the seat backrest to the
sitting position
- Releasetheseatbackrestby
pulling the control, then return it to
itsoriginalposition.
- Checkthatithascorrectlylockedin
place.
Returning the seat to its original
position
- Pushtheredcontrol.
- Unfoldtheentireseat.
Placing the seat in the fully folded
position
- Placetheseatinthetableposition.
- Raisethebarttedwithared
strap, located behind the seat, to
release feet of the seat from their
anchorageontheoor.
- Tilttheentireseatforwards.
Ensurethat:
- theseatislockedsecurelyon
theoor,
- the seat belt is available for
thepassenger.
89
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Entering, exiting from Row 3
Entering
- Place the row 2 seat in the table
position.
Exiting
- Lowertheheadrestraintfully.
- Operate the yellow control, located
onthebackoftherow2seat
backrest.
- Foldtheseatbackresttothetable
position.
Ensure that the centre seat belt is
stowed correctly in its housing in
theheadlining.
- Tilt it to the fully folded position to
allowaccess.
- Pull the red strap to place the seat
inthefullyfoldedposition.
- Tilttheentireseatforwards.
- Exitviathesidedoor.
Beforefoldingitback,ensurethat
the feet of the passenger in row 3
are not obstructing the row 2 seat
anchoringpoints.
90
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Removing a seat
- If necessary, move the front seats
forward.
- Lowertheheadrestraint.
- Place the seat in the fully folded
position.
- Tilt the entire seat forwards then
liftit.
Retting the seat
The label on the seat indicates the
positioninwhichitmustbeinstalled.
- Placethehooksofthefrontfeet
betweenthetwobars.
- Foldbacktheseattoxtherear
anchoringpoints.
- Operate the control to raise the
seatbacktoitsinitialposition.
- Raisetheheadrestraint.
Ensurethatnoobjectorfootofa
passenger seated in the rear is
obstructing the anchorage points
orpreventingcorrectlockingof
theseat.
Operating the Row 2 seats
91
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Operating the Row 3 seats
Removing the seat
- Lowertheheadrestraint.
- Place the seat in the fully folded
position.
- Tilttheentireseatforwards.
- Oneachside,takeholdofthe
uprights of the folded seat, tilting it
forwardslightly,andliftit.
Retting the seat
The label on the seat indicates the
positioninwhichitmustbeinstalled.
- Placethehooksofthefrontfeet
betweenthetwobars.
- Ensurethatnoobjectorfootis
obstructing the rear anchorage
points and that the seat belt is
positioned correctly and available
foruse.
- Foldbacktheseattoxitsrear
anchoringfeet.
- Operate the control to raise the
seatbacktoitsinitialposition.
- Raisetheheadrestraint.
Good practice
Followingthevariousoperations:
- do not remove a head restraint
without stowing it; secure it inside
the vehicle,
- ensure that the passengers can
always access the seat belts and
fasten them easily,
- passengersmustnevertake
theirseatwithoutadjustingand
fasteningtheirseatbelt.
- a passenger seated in row 3 must
ensure that he does not obstruct
the row 2 seat anchorage points,
- a passenger seated in row 3 must
not have the seat in front of them in
row 2 in the folded position; this is
in case the seat could tip towards
the passenger unexpectedly and
injurethem.
Donotplacehardorheavyobjectson
theseatbacksformingatable,they
couldbecomedangerousprojectilesin
theeventorsharpbrakingorimpact.
92
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
MODULARITY AND DIFFERENT SEAT CONFIGURATIONS
5 seat layouts
93
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Seats
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
7 seat layouts
The various operations
must be carried out while
stationary.
94
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
FRONT FITTINGS
1. Lower glove box
Thismayormaynotbettedwithalid.
Upper storage compartment
This is located on the dashboard,
behindthesteeringwheel.
Arecessmakesliftingofthelideasier
whenopening.Guideittoitsrest
position.
To close, guide the lid then press the
centregently.
Anyliquidwhichcouldspillrisks
causing an electrical short circuit and
thereforeapotentialre.
3. Side storage compartment
4. Bag hook
Onlyhangexiblebagswhicharenot
tooheavyonthishook.
2. Storage pocket and bottle
holder (1.5 L)
95
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Overhead storage unit
This is located above the sun visors
andcanaccommodatevariousobjects
(ajumper,le,gloves...).
The openings concealed by the sun
visors allow you to see and access the
objectsstoredintheoverheadstorage
unit.
The maximum weight permitted in the
overheadstorageunitis5Kg.
Donotplaceobjectsinthisstorage
unitwhichcouldpresentarisktothe
occupants.
Central storage console
This console offers an appreciable
additionalstoragearea:itcanbe
removed and clips onto a base which
also incorporates two cup holders at
therear.
Ensurethattheobject(bottle,can...)
placed in the cup holder is retained
securelyanddoesnotriskbeing
dislodgedwhiledriving.
Any liquid which could spill presents
ariskofdamageoncontactwiththe
instrument panel and centre console
controls.
Takecare.
Sun visor
To prevent dazzle from ahead, fold the
sunvisordown.
Apocketisprovidedinthedriver'ssun
visorforstoringtollcards,tickets,...
Storage compartment under
seats
Storage compartments are available,
withorwithoutlid,intheoorunderthe
frontseats.
To gain access to them, move the seat
forward.Thelidmustbeliftedfromthe
rearoftheseat.
96
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
SEATING AREA FITTINGS
Floor boxes
Two boxes are available, located under
therearpassengerfootwells.
Toopenthem,slideyourngersinto
therecessandliftthelid.
Aircraft style tables
To put the table in place, pull it
upwardsandfolditdown.
As a safety precaution, above a high
pressure, the table is designed to
unhook.
Toputitbackinplace,withthetable
vertical, engage one side then the
other,forcingslightly.
Donotplacehardorheavyobjects
onthetable.Theycouldbecome
dangerousprojectilesintheeventof
sharpbrakingorimpact.
Abaghookisprovidedonthesideof
eachtable.
Side blinds
Side blinds may be available on the
slidingsidedoors.
Pullthesideblindbythetabtoinstallit.
To avoid damaging the blind when
openingthedoor,checkthatthetabis
hookedsecurely.
Always guide the blind slowly
using the tab, both when raising
andwhenlowering.
97
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
MODUTOP ROOF
The multifunction roof extends the
overheadstorageunit.Itconsistsof
thefollowingcomponents:
Storage compartments
Storage compartments are provided
oneachsideoftheroof.Themaximum
authorisedloadis6kg.
The translucent base assists with
ndingobjectsstoredinside.
Donotstoreobjectswhichcould
presentarisktotheoccupants.
Courtesy lamp
The operation of the courtesy lamp is
identicaltothatofthefrontcourtesylamp.
Refer to chapter 4 "Practical
information", "Courtesy lamps"
section.
98
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
From inside From outside
Rear box
This roof box can be accessed from
therearseatsandtheboot.
Fromtherearseats,slidetheapsto
open.
Vents
A 3-position control allows you to
adjusttheairowthroughthevents.
Theventsarealsottedwithascented
airfreshener.
From the boot, place your thumb on
the recess then pull the handle to
open.
Opencarefullytopreventobjects
stored in this interior roof box from
fallingout.
Themaximumauthorisedloadis10kg.
99
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
SCENTED AIR FRESHENER
The scented air freshener diffuses
a fragrance in the passenger
compartment from the roof console
vents.
Adjusting the flow
Turnthechromedbuttontoadjustthe
diffusion:
- to the left to decrease,
- totherighttoincrease.
To stop the diffusion, turn the chromed
buttonfullytotheleft.
Removing the scented air
freshener
- Press the button down while turning
it a quarter of a turn to the left to
thestop.
- Remove the scented air freshener
fromtheroofconsole.
- Replacethecartridge.
100
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Replacing a cartridge
Thescentedairfreshenerrellconsists
of a cartridge B and its sealing case C.
- RemovetheprotectivelmD.
- Place the head of the cartridge B
on the button A of the scented air
freshener.
- Turnitaquarterofaturntolockit
onthebuttonandremovethecase.
- Insert the scented air freshener in
itslocation.
You can change the cartridges at any
time and store cartridges which have
already been started in their original
case.
The scented air freshener button A is
independentofthecartridge.
The cartridges are supplied without the
button A.
Inserting the scented air
freshener
Afterttingorchangingthecartridge:
- Putthescentedairfreshenerback
inplaceinitslocation.
- Turn it a quarter of a turn to the
right.
Good practice
As a safety precaution, only use the
cartridgesprovidedforthispurpose.
Donotdismantlethecartridges.
Keep the cartridge sealing cases
whichareusedaspackagingwhenthe
cartridgesarenotinuse.
Nevertrytorellthecartridgeswith
fragrances other than those available
fromCITROËNdealers.
Keep out of reach of children and
animals.Avoidcontactwiththeskin
andeyes.Ifswallowed,consulta
doctorandshowhimthepackagingor
productlabel.
The scented air freshener button A can
onlybexedonthemultifunctionroof
consolewithacartridge.
Therefore, always retain button A and
acartridge.
The cartridges are available from
CITROËNdealers.
101
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
MODUTOP ROOF BARS
The maximum authorised weight on
eachroofbaris35kg.
In all cases, the load must rest on
the non-slip bands provided for this
purpose and must not touch the roof or
theglazingoftheroof.
Recommendations for loading the
roof
This procedure requires the use of
a spanner supplied with the tools for
changingawheel.
These two longitudinal Modutop roof
barscanberemoved.
Chapter 9, "Changing a wheel"
section.
- Opentheprotectivecovers.
- Slackenthefourscrewsusingthe
spannerandremovethem.
- Turn the bars 90° placing the
hollowpartstowardsthefront.
- Retthethe4screwsandtighten
themusingthespanner.
- Closetheprotectivecovers.
- Use the strap passages A only to
securetheloadrmly.
102
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
EXTERIOR ROOF BARS
If you install transverse bars on these bars, refer to the weight values indicated
bythemanufacturerbutdonotexceed:75kg.
103
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Automatic switching on/off
The front courtesy lamp comes on when
thekeyisremovedfromtheignition,when
thevehicleisunlocked,whenoneofthe
front doors is opened and for location of
thevehicleusingtheremotecontrol.
It goes off gradually after the ignition is
switched on and when the vehicle is
locked.
Frontseats:comesonwhen
one of the front doors is
opened.
These are switched on and off by
means of a manual switch, with
theignitionon.
Rearseats:comesonwhen
one of the rear doors is
opened.
If the doors remain open for
a few minutes, the courtesy
lampsgooff.
Permanentlyoff.
Permanentlyon,ignitionon.
Front courtesy lamp
COURTESY LAMPS
Rear courtesy lamp Front individual reading lamps
104
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
LOAD SPACE COVER (5 SEAT VERSION)
Thisrigidshelfconcealstheobjects
storedintheboot.
Removing
Foldtheloadspacecover.
Detach it from the notches A and B
pullingittowardsyou.
Raiseitandremovetheassembly.
Retting
Place the load space cover in front
of A and B.
Push it forwards to insert the lugs in
thenotches.
Unfold and clip into the notches C.
Folding
From the boot, fold the half-shelf,
raising it to detach it from the notch C.
Storing (according to version)
Alocationisprovidedinthebackofthe
rear seats to accommodate the load
spacecoverfoldedontoitself.
Slide it vertically between the side
guideslocatedatmidseatbackheight.
Insertthehingerst,withthefreeaps
turnedupwards.
This rigid load space cover can
formashelf.However,asasafety
measure,donotplaceobjects
on it which could become dangerous
projectilesintheeventofsharpbraking
orrearimpact.
105
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
12 volt socket (120 W max)
It is advisable to limit the use of this
sockettoavoiddischargingthebattery.
Protective net
Openthecoverlocatedinthehook
support.
Fix the top of the net in the notches,
havingrstturnedthebar1/4ofaturn.
Ensure that the end of the bar engages
correctly in the metal part of its
location.
Fix the straps in the locations provided
ontheoor.
Tightenthenetusingthestraps.
Stowing rings
Use these rings to secure loads on the
oor.
The connection of an electrical
device not approved by CITROËN,
such as a USB charger, may
adversely affect the operation of
vehicle electrical systems, causing
faults such as poor telephone reception
or interference with displays in the
screens.
106
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
REAR FITTINGS
(7 SEAT VERSION)
Cup holder
Any liquid carried in a cup (mug or
other) on board which could spill,
presentsarisk.
Takecare.
12 volt socket (120 W max)
It is advisable to limit the use of this
sockettoavoiddischargingthebattery.
Stowing rings
Usethestowingringsontheoorto
secureandretainyourloadsrmly.
The seat belt anchorages must not be
usedforthispurpose.
It is recommended that the load is
immobilisedbysecuringitrmly
using the stowing rings on the
oor.
107
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Storage flaps
Raisethecorrespondingap.
Next to the boot sill, the recess is
intended to receive the roller tube
containingtheloadspacecover.
Seat belts
Ensure that the centre seat belt has
reeled in correctly to its carrier in the
roof.
Preventtherow3seatbeltbuckles
fromknockingbyraisingthemasclose
as possible to the anchorages in the
roof.
Theseatbeltbuckleattachmentrings
on each side of the boot must not be
usedtoretainloads.
108
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
BLIND, LOAD SPACE COVER
Position the load space screen so as to
presenttherearloadspacecoveraps
towardsyou.
Engage the left-hand lug of the roller in
the support A.
The load space cover is the roller blind
type.Takecarenottoplaceheavy
objectsontheloadspacecoverwhen
unreeled.
Compress then place the right-hand
lug facing the support B.
Release to engage the roller in its
support.
Unroll the load space cover to the rear
sidepillars.
Engage the ends in the rear notches to
keepittaut.
To install it
Place the row 3 seats in the fully folded
position.
Raisethestorageapatthebootsill.
Takeholdoftherollerinthecentreand
compressittowardstheleft-handpillar.
Raisetheassembly.
109
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Practical information
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
To remove it
From the boot, pull the load space
cover towards you to release it from
thesidepillars.
Guidetheloadspacecoverasitrollsup.
Removetheclipsofthethreeaps
from the base of each row 2 head
restraint.
Compress the roller to the left to
remove it from the support B.
Raiseitandpivotitforwards.
To store it
Store it in the recess at the boot sill,
withthetworearapsuppermost.
First, compress the load space screen
totheleft.
Release.
Arrangethetwoapsandclosethe
storageap.
Therolleristtedwiththreeaps
permitting concealment of the
boot, whether the row 2 seats
are in the normal position or the
comfortposition.
Eachaphastwoclipswhichare
hookedonthebaseofeachhead
restraint.
110
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Mirrors and windows
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Adjusting electric door mirrors
- Move the control to the right or to
the left to select the corresponding
mirror.
- Move the control in all four
directionstoadjust.
- Return the control to the central
position.
MIRRORS
Heated mirrorsAdjusting manual door mirrors
Forced folding
If the mirror casing has come out of
its initial location, with the vehicle
stationary reposition the mirror casing
manually or use the electric folding
control.
Press the heated rear screen
button.
Move the lever in all four directions to
adjust.
Whenthevehicleisparked,thedoor
mirrorscanbefoldedbackmanually.
The mirrors are not equipped with
automaticheating.
Electric folding / unfolding
The mirrors can be folded or unfolded
electrically from the inside, with the
vehicleparkedandtheignitionon:
- Place the control in the central
position.
- Turnthecontroldownwards.
Themirrorsthathaveelectricfolding/
unfoldingcanbeheated.
111
EASE OF USE and COMFORT
4
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Mirrors and windows
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
SURVEILLANCE MIRROR
This mirror, placed on top of the
central mirror, enables the driver or
front passenger to observe all the rear
seats.
Fittedonitsownballjoint,itsmanual
adjustmentissimpleandprovidesa
viewoftherearinteriorofthevehicle.
Itcanalsobeadjustedforimproved
visibility during manoeuvres or when
overtaking.
REAR WINDOWS
To partially open the rear windows, tilt
theleverandpushitfullytolockthe
windowsintheopenposition.
Manual rear view mirror
Therearviewmirrorhastwopositions:
- day (normal),
- night(anti-dazzle).
To change from one to the other, push
or pull the lever on the lower edge of
themirror.
112
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
Mirrors and windows
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap04_Ergonomie_ed02-2016
ELECTRIC WINDOWS
Lower the window fully, then raise it, it
will rise in steps of a few centimetres
eachtimethecontrolispressed.
Repeat the operation until the window
isfullyclosed.
Continue to press the control for at
least one second after the window
closedpositionhasbeenreached.
The safety anti-pinch does not operate
duringtheseoperations.
Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets an
obstacle,itstopsandpartiallylowers.
Manual mode
This mode is available
depending on equipment; it is
identiedbythissymbolonthe
controlinquestion.
Good practice
If the electric windows meet an
obstacle during operation, you must
reversethemovementofthewindow.
Todothis,pressthecontrolconcerned.
When the driver operates the
passenger electric window controls,
they must ensure that no one is
preventing correct closing of the
windows.
The driver must ensure that the
passengers use the electric windows
correctly.
Be aware of children when operating
thewindows.
Followingseveralconsecutiveclosing/
opening operations of the electric
window control, a protection system
is triggered which only allows closing
ofthewindow.Afterclosing,wait
approximately40minutes.Oncethis
time has elapsed, the control becomes
operationalagain.
1. Driver's side
2. Passenger's side
Reinitialisation
Following reconnection of the battery,
or in the event of a malfunction, the
safety anti-pinch function must be
reinitialised.
The electrical functions of the electric
windowsaredeactivated:
- approximately 45 seconds after the
ignition is switched off,
- after one of the front doors is
opened,iftheignitionisoff.
Therearetwooperatingmodes:
Press or pull the control, without
passingthepointofresistance.
The window stops when you release
thecontrol.
One-touch mode
Press or pull the control, beyond the
pointofresistance.
The window opens or closes fully when
thecontrolisreleased.
Pressing or pulling the control again
stopsthemovementofthewindow.
113
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
Driving safely
Labels are applied at various
pointsonyourvehicle.They
carry safety warnings as well as
vehicleidenticationinformation.Do
notremovethem:theyformanintegral
partofyourvehicle.
GENERAL SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS
Foranyworkonyourvehicle,use
aqualiedworkshopthathasthe
technicalinformation,skillsand
equipment required, all of which a
CITROËNdealerisabletoprovide.
We draw your attention to the
following points:
- Thettingofelectricalequipment
or accessories not listed by
CITROËN may cause excessive
current consumption and faults and
failures with the electrical system of
yourvehicle.ContactaCITROËN
dealer for information on the range
ofrecommendedaccessories.
- As a safety measure, access to
thediagnosticsocket,usedfor
the vehicle's electronic systems,
is reserved strictly for CITROËN
dealersorqualiedworkshops,
equipped with the special tools
required(riskofmalfunctionsofthe
vehicle's electronic systems that
couldcausebreakdownsorserious
accidents).Themanufacturer
cannot be held responsible if this
adviceisnotfollowed.
- Anymodicationoradaptation
not intended or authorised by
Automobiles CITROËN or carried
out without meeting the technical
requirementsdenedbythe
manufacturer would lead to the
suspension of the legal and
contractualwarranties.
Installation of accessory radio
communication transmitters
Before installing a radio communication
transmitter, you must contact a
CITROËNdealerforthespecication
oftransmitterswhichcanbetted
(frequency, maximum power,
aerialposition,specicinstallation
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive(2004/104/EC).
Depending on the legislation in
force in the country, certain safety
equipmentmaybecompulsory:
high visibility safety vests, warning
triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs,
sparefuses,reextinguisher,rst
aidkit,mudapsattherearofthe
vehicle...
114
Driving safely
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
HORN
Pressthecentreofthesteeringwheel.
PARKING BRAKE
Applying
Pulltheparkingbrakeleverupto
immobiliseyourvehicle.
Checkthattheparkingbrakeisapplied
rmlybeforeleavingthevehicle.
Pullontheparkingbrakelever,only
with the vehicle stationary.
In the exceptional case of use of the
parkingbrakewhenthevehicleis
moving,applythebrakebypulling
gentlytoavoidlockingtherearwheels
(riskofskidding).
Press this button, the direction
indicatorsash.
Theycanoperatewiththeignitionoff.
The hazard warning lamps should only
be used in dangerous situations, when
stopping in an emergency or when
drivinginunusualconditions.
Whenparkingonaslope,directyour
wheels towards the pavement and pull
theparkingbrakeleverup.
There is no advantage in engaging
agearafterparkingthevehicle,
particularlyifthevehicleisloaded.
Iftheparkingbrakeisstillonorhas
not been released properly, this is
indicated by this warning lamp which
comesonintheinstrumentpanel.
Automatic operation of hazard
warning lamps
Whenbrakinginanemergency,
depending on the force of deceleration,
the hazard warning lamps come
onautomatically.Theyswitchoff
automaticallythersttimeyou
accelerate.
It is also possible to switch them off by
pressingtheswitchonthedashboard.
Releasing
Pull the lever up slightly and press the
buttontolowertheparkingbrakelever.
115
Parking sensors
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
The audible (front and rear) and visual
(rear)parkingsensorsystemconsists
of proximity sensors, installed in the
rearbumper.
The sensors detect any obstacle which
entersitseldofoperation:person,
vehicle, tree, fence, behind the vehicle
duringthemanoeuvre.
Certainobjectsdetectedatthe
beginning of the manoeuvre will no
longer be detected at the end of the
manoeuvre due to the blind spots
betweenandbelowthesensors.
Examples:stake,roadworksconeor
pavementpost.
Engage reverse gear
PARKING SENSORS
Display in the screen
Anaudiblesignalconrmsthe
activation of the system by engaging
reversegear.
The proximity information is indicated
by an audible signal which becomes
more rapid as the vehicle approaches
theobstacle.
When the distance between the rear
of the vehicle and the obstacle is less
than approximately thirty centimetres,
the audible signal becomes
continuous.
116
Parking sensors
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
Activation / Deactivation
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the LED
in the button comes on, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message in
thescreen.
ContactaCITROËNdealerorqualied
workshop.
Good practice
In bad weather or in winter, ensure that
the sensors are not covered with mud,
iceorsnow.
The system will be deactivated
automatically if a trailer is being towed
orifabicyclecarrieristted(vehicle
ttedwithatowbarorbicyclecarrier
recommendedbyCITROËN).
You can activate or deactivate
the system by pressing this
button.
The activation or deactivation
of the system is stored when
thevehiclestops.
Engage forward gear
Inadditiontotherearparkingsensors,
thefrontparkingsensorsaretriggered
when an obstacle is detected in
front of the vehicle and the speed
of the vehicle remains below 6 mph
(10km/h).
Thetonefromthespeaker(front
or rear) allows an obstacle to be
identiedaseitherinfrontofor
behindthevehicle.
Stop the assistance
Changetoneutral.
Theparkingsensorsystem
cannot, in any circumstances,
taketheplaceofthevigilanceand
responsibilityofthedriver.
117
Parking sensors
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
REVERSING CAMERA
The reversing camera is activated
automatically when reverse gear is
engaged.
The image is displayed in the touch
screentablet.
The reversing camera function may be
completedwithparkingsensors.
The reversing camera cannot in
any circumstances be a substitute
for vigilance on the part of the
driver.
High pressure jet washing
When washing your vehicle, do
not direct the lance within 30 cm of
thecameralens.
The superimposed representation of
guidelineshelpswiththemanoeuvre.
Theyarerepresentedbylinesmarked
"on the ground" and do not allow the
position of the vehicle to be determined
relativetotallobstacles(forexample:
othervehicles,...).
Some deformation of the image is
normal.
The blue lines represent the general
direction of the vehicle (the difference
corresponds to the width of your
vehiclewithoutthemirrors).
The red lines represent a distance of
about 30 cm beyond the edge of your
vehicle'srearbumper.
The green lines represent distances of
about 1 and 2 metres beyond the edge
ofyourvehicle'srearbumper.
The turquoise blue curves represent
themaximumturningcircle.
Opening the tailgate causes the
displaytodisappear.
Clean the reversing camera regularly
usingasoft,drycloth.
ABS
ABS
118
Driving safely
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS / EBFD)
TheABSandEBFD(electronicbrake
force distribution) systems improve the
stability and manoeuvrability of your
vehicleonbraking,inparticularon
poororslipperysurfaces.
TheABSpreventslockingofthe
wheels, the EBFD provides control of
thebrakingpressurewheelbywheel.
If this warning lamp comes
on, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message
in the screen, it indicates a
malfunction of the ABS which
could result in a loss of control of the
vehicleonbraking.
If this warning lamp comes
on,togetherwiththebrake
and STOP warning lamps,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message in the
screen, it indicates a malfunction of
theelectronicbrakeforcedistribution
which could result in a loss of control of
thevehicleonbraking.
EMERGENCY BRAKING
ASSISTANCE (EBA)
In an emergency, this system enables
theoptimumbrakingpressuretobe
reachedmorequickly,pressthepedal
rmlywithoutreleasingit.
It is triggered by the speed at which the
brakepedalispresseddown.
Thisalterstheresistanceofthebrake
pedalunderyourfoot.
To maintain operation of the
emergencybrakingassistancesystem:
keepyourfootonthebrakepedal.
Good practice
Theanti-lockbrakingsystemcomes
into operation automatically when
thereisariskofwheellock.Itdoesnot
reducethebrakingdistance.
On very slippery surfaces (ice,
oil,etc...)theABSmayincreasethe
brakingdistance.Whenbrakingin
an emergency, do not hesitate to
pressthebrakepedalrmly,without
releasing the pressure, even on a
slippery surface, you will then be able
to continue to manoeuvre the vehicle
toavoidanobstacle.
Normal operation of the ABS may be
feltbyslightvibrationofthebrake
pedal.
When changing wheels (tyres and
rims), ensure that these are listed by
CITROËNforthevehicle.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In both cases, contact a CITROËN
dealeroraqualiedworkshop.
119
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
Driving safely
ANTI-SLIP REGULATION (ASR)
AND DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)
Thesesystemsarelinkedand
complementtheABS.
The ASR system is very useful for
maintaining optimum drive and
avoiding losses of control of the vehicle
onacceleration.
The system optimises drive to prevent
thewheelsskidding,byactingonthe
brakesofthedrivewheelsandonthe
engine.Italsoallowsthedirectional
stability of the vehicle to be improved
onacceleration.
Use the DSC to hold your course
withoutattemptingtocountersteer.
If there is a variation between the
trajectoryfollowedbythevehicleand
that required by the driver, the DSC
system automatically acts on the
engineandthebrakeofoneormore
wheels,inordertoputthevehicleback
oncourse.
Deactivation
In certain exceptional conditions
(startingthevehiclewhenstuckinmud
orsnow,oronlooseground...),itcould
prove useful to deactivate the ASR and
DSCsystemstomakethewheelsspin
andregaingrip.
Operating fault
Good practice
TheASR/DSCsystemsofferincreased
safety during normal driving, but
shouldnotincitethedrivertotakerisks
ortodriveathighspeed.
The operation of these systems is
ensured if the recommendations
of the manufacturer regarding
the wheels (tyres and rims), the
brakingcomponents,theelectronic
componentsandthettingandrepair
proceduresareobserved.
After an impact, have these systems
checkedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualiedworkshop.
Operation
Thewarninglampashes
when operation of the ASR or
DSCistriggered.
They engage again:
- automatically above 30 mph
(50km/h),
When a malfunction of the
systems occurs, the warning
lamp and the LED come on,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message in the
screen.
- Press the button or turn
the dial to the DSC OFF
position (depending on
model).
- TheLEDcomeson:theASRand
DSC systems no longer come into
play.
- manually by pressing the
button again or by turning
the dial to this position
(dependingonmodel).
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshoptohavethesystem
checked.
The warning lamp may also come on if
thetyresareunder-inated.Checkthe
pressureofeachtyre.
120
Driving safely
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
GRIP CONTROL
Correct use
Your vehicle is designed principally to
drive on tarmac roads but it allows you
to drive on other less passable terrain
occasionally.
However, particularly when your
vehicle is heavily laden, it does not
permitoff-roadactivitiessuchas:
- crossing and driving on ground
which could damage the underbody
or tear off components (fuel pipe,
fuelcooler,...),particularlyby
obstacles or stones,
- driving on ground with steep
gradients and poor grip,
- crossingastream.
On snow, mud or sand, traction control
is obtained by a compromise between
safety, grip, traction and appropriate
tyres.
It adapts to allows most conditions of
poorgriptobeaccommodated.
The accelerator pedal must be pressed
enough for there to be adequate
engine power to manage the various
parametersinthebestway.
121
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
Driving safely
Different modesareavailable:
Normal (ESC)
ESC OFF
Snow
This mode allows the vehicle
to adapts its strategy to the
conditions of grip encountered
for each of the two front
wheels,onmovingoff.
When moving, the system optimises
wheelspin to provide the best
acceleration possible for the grip
available.
Off road
(mud, wet grass, ...)
When moving off, this
mode allows considerable
wheelspin on the wheel
with the least grip to favour
clearing of the mud and
regain"grip".
At the same time, the wheel with the
most grip is controlled in such a way as
totransmitasmuchtorqueaspossible.
When moving, the system optimises
wheelspin to meet the driver's
requirementsasfullyaspossible.
Sand
This mode allows a little
wheelspin on the two driving
wheels at the same time to
allow the vehicle to move
forwardandreducestherisk
ofgettingstuckinthesand.
Do not use the other modes on sand
asthevehiclemaybecomestuck.
This mode is calibrated for a
lowlevelofskidding,based
on different conditions of grip
encounteredontheroad.
When the ignition is switched off, the
system returns automatically to DSC
mode.
This mode is only suitable
forspecicconditions
encountered when moving off
oratlowspeed.
Above30mph(50km/h)
the system returns to DSC mode
automatically.
122
Driving safely
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
ACTIVE CITY BRAKE
ActiveCityBrakeisadriving
assistance system that aims to avoid
a frontal collision or reduce the speed
of an impact if the driver does not
reactsufciently(inadequatebrake
application).
This system is designed to
improvedrivingsafety.
It remains the driver's responsibility to
continuously monitor the state of the
trafcandtoassessthedistancesand
relativespeedsofothervehicles.
ActiveCityBrakecaninno
circumstances replace the need for
vigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
Neverlookatthelasersensor
through an optical instrument
(magnifyingglass,microscope...)
at a distance of less than
10centimetres:riskofeyeinjury.
Principle
Using a laser sensor located at the top
of the windscreen, this system detects
a vehicle running in the same direction
orstationaryaheadofyourvehicle.
Whennecessary,thevehicle'sbraking
system is operated automatically
to avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.
Automaticbrakingoccurslater
than if done by the driver, so as
to intervene only when there is a
highriskofcollision.
Conditions for activation
ActiveCityBrakeonlyoperatesifthe
followingconditionsaremet:
● ignitionon,
● thevehicleisinaforwardgear,
● speedisbetweenabout3and
18mph(5and30km/h),
● thebrakingassistancesystems
(ABS,EBFD,emergencybraking
assistance) are not faulty,
● thetrajectorycontrolsystems
(ASR, DSC) are not deactivated
or faulty,
● thevehicleisnotinatightcorner,
● thesystemhasnotbeentriggered
duringtheprevious10seconds.
123
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
Driving safely
Operation
When your vehicle is too close to or
approaches the vehicle ahead too
quicklythesystemautomatically
appliesthebrakestoavoidacollision.
You are then alerted by the display of a
message.
Thebrakelampsonyourvehiclecome
ontowarnotherroadusers.
The collision can be avoided
automatically if the difference in
speed between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead does not exceed 9 mph
(15km/h).
Above this threshold, the system will
do what is possible to avoid or reduce
the accident by lowering the speed of
impact.
Theautomaticbrakingmaybring
the vehicle to a complete stop if the
situationrequiresit.
In this case, the vehicle is held
stationary temporarily (for about
1.5seconds)toallowthedrivertotake
backcontrolbypressingthebrake
pedal.
The triggering of the system may
cause the engine to stall, unless
the driver depresses the clutch
pedalquicklyenoughduringautomatic
braking.
Duringautomaticbraking,the
driver can always obtain a higher
rate of deceleration than that
controlled by the system, by pressing
rmlyonthebrakepedal.
After an impact, the system is
automaticallyputoutofservice:it
nolongeroperates.
You must go to a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshoptohavethesystem
madeoperationalagain.
Operating limits
The system only detects vehicles that
are stationary or moving in the same
directionasyourvehicle.
It does not detect small vehicles
(bicycles, motorcycles),
pedestrians or animals, nor non-
reectivestationaryobjects.
The system is not triggered or is
interruptedifthedriver:
- accelerates strongly
- or turns the steering wheel
suddenly(avoidingmanoeuvre).
Indifcultweatherconditions(very
heavyrain,snow,fog,hail...),
brakingdistancesincrease,which
can reduce the ability of the system to
avoidacollision.
The driver must therefore remain
particularlyvigilant.
Never leave accumulations of
snoworanyobjectprojecting
above the bonnet or in front of
theroof:thismightfallintotheeldof
vision of the sensor and generate a
detection.
124
Driving safely
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
Deactivation
The system is deactivated in the
vehiclecongurationmenu,accessible
withtheignitionon.
Its state is memorised when the
ignitionisswitchedoff.
When the system is deactivated,
a message is displayed every
time the ignition is switched on,
towarnyou.
With the monochrome screen C
F Press the MENU button for access
tothemainmenu.
F Select "Personalisation-
Conguration".
F Select "Dene vehicle
parameters".
F Select "Driving assistance".
F Select "Automatic emergency
braking: OFF" or "Automatic
emergency braking: ON".
F Press the "7" or "8" button to
checkorunchecktheboxand
activate or deactivate the system
respectively.
F Press the "5" or "6" button, then
the OK button to select the "OK"
boxandconrmortheBack button
tocancel.
With the touch screen tablet
F Press the "MENU"button.
F Select the " Driving"menu.
F In the secondary page, select
"Vehicle settings".
F Select the "Driving assistance"
tab.
F Checkoruncheckthe"Auto
emergency braking" box to
activateordeactivatethesystem.
F Conrm.
125
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
Driving safely
Operating faults
Sensor fault
The operation of the laser sensor may
suffer interference from accumulations
ofdirtormistingofthewindscreen.
In this case you are warned by the
displayofamessage.
Use the windscreen demisting
and regularly clean the area of the
windscreeninfrontofthesensor.
Donotstickorotherwisexany
objectonthewindscreeninfront
ofthesensor.
System fault
In the event of a malfunction of the
system, you are warned by an audible
signal and the display of the message
"Automatic braking system fault".
Havethesystemcheckedbya
CITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshop.
In the event of an impact to
the windscreen at the sensor,
deactivate the system and contact
aCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshoptohaveyourwindscreen
replaced.
Nevertrytoremove,adjustortest
thesensor.
Only a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshopisabletowork
onthesystem.
When towing a trailer or when the
vehicle is being towed, the system
mustbedeactivated.
126
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
126
Seat belts
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
SEAT BELTS
Height adjustment
Squeeze the control with the return and
slide the assembly on the driver's seat
side and on the individual passenger
seatside.
Fastening
Pull the strap, then insert the tongue
intothebuckle.
Checkthattheseatbeltisfastened
correctlybypullingthestrap.
Seat belt(s) not fastened
warning lamp
Unfastening
Presstheredbutton.
When the vehicle is started,
this warning lamp comes on
if a user at the front has not
fastenedtheirseatbelt.
Good practice
The driver must ensure that
passengers use the seat belts correctly
and that they are all strapped in
securelybeforemovingoff.
Wherever you are seated in the
vehicle, always fasten your seat belt,
evenforshortjourneys.
Theseatbeltsarettedwithaninertia
reelwhichautomaticallyadjuststhe
lengthofthestraptoyoursize.
Do not use accessories (clothes pegs,
clips,safetypins,etc.)whichallowthe
seatbeltstrapstotloosely.
Ensure that the seat belt has reeled in
correctlyafteruse.
After folding or moving a seat or a rear
bench seat, ensure that the seat belt
has reeled in correctly and that the
buckleisreadytoaccommodatethe
tongue.
Depending on the nature and
seriousness of any impact, the
pretensioning device may be deployed
beforeandindependentlyofination
oftheairbags.Itinstantlytightens
the seat belts against the body of the
occupants.
Deployment of the pretensioners is
accompanied by a slight discharge
ofharmlesssmokeandanoise,due
to the activation of the pyrotechnic
cartridgeincorporatedinthesystem.
The front passenger's seat may be
ttedwithapresencedetector,inwhich
case you should not place anything
heavy on this seat as this could trigger
thealert.
127
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
Seat belts
Recommendations for children:
- use a suitable child seat if the
passenger is less than 12 years old
orshorterthanonemetrefty,
- never allow a child to travel on
your lap, even with the seat belt
fastened.
For more information on child
seats, refer to the "Child safety"
sectionofchapter5.
Clean the seat belt straps with
soapy water or a textile cleaning
product, sold by CITROËN
dealers.
In accordance with current safety
regulations, your CITROËN dealer can
guaranteeallworkoranychecks,from
testing to maintenance, on your seat
beltequipment.
Havetheseatbeltscheckedregularly
(even after a minor impact) by a
CITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshop:theymustnotshowany
signs of wear, cutting or fraying
and they must not be converted or
modied.
The force limiter reduces the pressure
of the seat belt against the body of the
occupants.
The pretensioning seat belts are active
whentheignitionisswitchedon.
Theinertiareelsarettedwithadevice
whichautomaticallylocksthestrapin
the event of a collision or emergency
brakingorifthevehiclerollsover.
You can unfasten the seat belt by
pressingtheredbuttononthebuckle.
Guidetheseatbeltafterunfastening.
The airbag warning lamp comes on
ifthepretensionersaredeployed.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshop.
Inordertobeeffective,aseatbelt:
- must restrain one person only,
- mustnotbetwisted,checkby
pulling in front of you with an even
movement,
- must be tightened as close to the
bodyaspossible.
The upper part of the seat belt should
be positioned in the hollow of the
shoulder.
The lap part should be placed as low
aspossibleonthepelvis.
Do not interchange the seat belt
bucklesastheywillnotfulltheirrole
properly.Iftheseatsarettedwith
armrests, the lap part of the seat belt
shouldalwayspassunderthearmrest.
Checkthattheseatbeltisfastened
correctlybypullingthestraprmly.
Front seat belts
Thefrontseatsarettedwith
pretensionersandforcelimiters.
Rear seat belts
(5 seat version)
Therearseatsarettedwith
three-pointinertiareelseatbelts.
128
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
128
Seat belts
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
Rear seat belts
(7 seat version)
In row 2
Thethreeseatsarettedwith
three-pointinertiareelseatbelts.
When folding the side seats or the
seatbackstothetableposition,
avoid trapping the strap of the centre
seatbelt.
When handling the side seats
(removing/installing)orwhen
accessingrow3,avoidhookingthe
centreseatbelt.
Ensure that the centre seat belt is
rolled up correctly in its strengthener
ontheroof.
In row 3
Thetwoseatsarettedwith
three-pointinertiareelseatbelts.
Do not attach the seat belts to the
stowingringsmarkedwitharedcross,
representedonthelabel.
Takecaretohooktheseatbelts
correctly on the rings provided for this
purpose.
The row 3 seat belts which are not in
use can be stored to clear the load
spaceandmakeuseoftheloadspace
covereasier.
Hookthesnaphookinthelocation
providedontherearpillartrim.
129
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
129
Airbags
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
AIRBAGS
General information
The airbags have been designed to
maximise the safety of the occupants
in the event of a serious collision;
theyworkinconjunctionwiththeforce
limitingseatbelts.
In the event of a serious collision, the
electronic detectors record and analyse
the front and side impacts suffered in
theimpactdetectionzones:
- in the event of a serious impact,
theairbagsinateinstantlyand
contribute towards better protecting
the occupants of the vehicle;
immediately after the impact, the
airbagsdeaterapidly,sothatthey
do not hinder the visibility of the
occupants nor their possible exit
fromthevehicle.
- in the event of a minor or rear
impact and in certain roll-over
conditions, the airbags will not be
deployed; the seat belt alone is
sufcienttocontributetowardsyour
protectioninthesesituations.
The seriousness of the collision
depends on the nature of the obstacle
and the speed of the vehicle at the
momentofimpact.
130
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
130
Airbags
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
Advice
Sitinanormaluprightposition.
Wearacorrectlyadjustedseatbelt.
Do not allow anything to come between
the occupants and the airbags
(achild,pet,object...),donotattachor
xanythingneartotheairbagsortheir
trajectorieswheninatingasthiscould
causeinjurieswhentheairbagsare
deployed.
Nevermodifytheoriginaldenitionof
your vehicle, particularly in the area
directlyaroundtheairbags.
After an accident or if the vehicle has
beenstolenorbrokeninto,havethe
airbagsystemschecked.
Allworkontheairbagsystemmustbe
carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshop.
Even if all of the precautions
mentionedareobserved,ariskof
injuryorofminorburnstothehead,
chest or arms when an airbag is
deployedcannotberuledout.The
baginatesalmostinstantly(withina
fewmilliseconds)thendeateswithin
the same time discharging the hot gas
viaopeningsprovidedforthispurpose.
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel
byitsspokesorrestingyourhandson
thecentrepartofthewheel.
Passengers must not place their feet
onthedashboard.
Donotsmokeasdeploymentofthe
airbagscancauseburnsortheriskof
injuryfromacigaretteorpipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering
wheelorhititviolently.
Donottorattachanythingtothe
steering wheel or dashboard, this could
causeinjurieswithdeploymentofthe
airbags.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the
seats, compatible with the deployment
thelateralairbags.Forinformation
on the range of seat covers suitable
for your vehicle, you can contact a
CITROËNdealer.
For more information on accessories,
refer to "Other accessories" in
section6.
Donotxorattachanythingtotheseat
backs(clothing...).Thiscouldcause
injurytothechestorarmsifthelateral
airbagisdeployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the
body any nearer to the door than
necessary.
Airbags only operate when the
ignition is switched on.
Thisequipmentonlyoperatesonce.
If a second impact occurs (during the
same or a subsequent accident), the
airbagwillnotoperate.
The deployment of an airbag or airbags
is accompanied by a slight discharge
ofsmokeandanoise,duetothe
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporatedinthesystem.
Thissmokeisnotharmful,but
sensitive individuals may experience
someirritation.
The noise of the detonation may result
in a slight loss of hearing for a short
time.
The passenger's front airbag must
be deactivated if a child seat is
installedrearwardfacing.
Chapter5,"Childsafety"section.
131
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
131
Airbags
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
Curtain airbags
This is a system which protects the
driver and passengers (with the
exception of the centre seat of row 2)
in the event of a serious side impact in
ordertolimittheriskofheadinjuries.
Each curtain airbag is incorporated in
the pillars and the upper part of the
passengercompartment.
Activation
It is triggered at the same time as the
corresponding lateral airbag in the
event of a serious side impact applied
to all or part of the side impact zone B,
perpendicular to the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal
plane and directed from the outside
towardstheinsideofthevehicle.
Thecurtainairbaginatesbetweenthe
front or rear occupant of the vehicle
andthewindows.
Lateral airbags
This is a system which protects the
driver and front passenger in the event
of a serious side impact in order to limit
theriskofinjurytothechest.
Eachlateralairbagisttedinthefront
seatbackrestframe,onthedoorside.
Deployment
It is deployed unilaterally in the event
of a serious side impact applied to
all or part of the side impact zone B,
perpendicular to the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal
plane and directed from the outside
towardstheinsideofthevehicle.
Thelateralairbaginatesbetweenthe
front occupant of the vehicle and the
correspondingdoortrimpanel.
Impact detection zones
A. Frontimpactzone.
B. Sideimpactzone.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes
on in the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message in the
screen, contact a CITROËN
dealeroraqualiedworkshoptohave
thesystemchecked.Theairbagsmay
no longer be deployed in the event of a
seriousimpact.
In the event of a minor impact or
bump on the side of the vehicle or
if the vehicle rolls over, the airbag
maynotbedeployed.
132
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
132
Airbags
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
Front airbags
Deployment
They are deployed, except the
passenger's front airbag if it has been
deactivated, in the event of a serious
front impact applied to all or part of the
front impact zone A in the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal
plane directed from the front towards
therearofthevehicle.
Thefrontairbaginatesbetweenthe
front occupant of the vehicle and the
dashboard to cushion their forward
movement.
Deactivating the passengers front
airbag
Only the passenger's front airbag can
bedeactivated.
- With the ignition switched off,
insertthekeyintothepassenger's
frontairbagdeactivationswitch.
- Turn it to the "OFF"position.
- Removethekeykeepingtheswitch
inthenewposition.
The passenger's front airbag
warning lamp in the instrument
panel remains on while the
airbagisdeactivated.
If the two airbag warning lamps
are on continuously, do not install
a rearward facing child seat and
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshop.
Front airbag fault
To ensure the safety of your child,
it is essential to deactivate the
passenger's front airbag when you
install a rearward facing child seat on
thefrontpassengerseat.Otherwise,
thechildwouldriskbeingkilledor
seriouslyinjurediftheairbagwere
deployed.
Reactivation
In the "OFF" position, the passenger's
front airbag will not be deployed in the
eventofanimpact.
As soon as the child seat is removed,
turn the passenger's front airbag switch
to the "ON" position to reactivate the
airbag and thus ensure the safety
of your passenger in the event of an
impact.
If this warning lamp comes
on, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message
in the screen, consult a
CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshoptohave
thesystemchecked.
Thefrontairbagsarettedinthe
centre of the steering wheel for the
driver and in the dashboard for the
frontpassenger.
133
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
133
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
CARRYING CHILDREN
General points
CITROËN recommends that
children should travel in the rear
seatsofyourvehicle:
- rearward facing up to the age of 3,
- forward facingovertheageof3.
Although one of CITROËN's main
criteria when designing your vehicle,
the safety of your children also
dependsonyou.
* The regulations on carrying children
arespecictoeachcountry.Referto
thelegislationinforceinyourcountry.
For maximum safety, please observe
thefollowingrecommendations:
- in accordance with European
regulations, all children under the
age of 12 or less than one and
a half metres tall must travel in
approved child seats suited to
their weight,onseatsttedwitha
seat belt or ISOFIX mountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in
your vehicle for carrying children
are the rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg
must travel in the rearward
facing position both in the front
and in the rear.
134
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
134
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
CHILD SEAT AT THE FRONT
Refer to the legislation in your
country before installing your child
inthisseatingposition.
Rearward facing Forward facing
When a forward facing child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat,
the passenger's front airbag must
remainactive:
Adjustthevehicle'sseatto:
- thefullybackposition,withthe
backreststraightenedforaseat
withoutheightadjuster,
- thefullybackpositionand
highestposition,withthebackrest
straightened for a seat with height
adjuster.
Ensure that the seat belt is
correctlytensioned.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that this is in steady contact
withtheoor.Ifnot,adjustthe
passengerseat.
Passenger seat in the fully back and
highest position.
When a rearward facing child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat,
the passenger's front airbag must be
deactivated.Otherwisethe child risks
being seriously injured or killed if
the airbag is deployed.
Adjustthevehicle'sseatto:
- thefullybackposition,withthe
backreststraightenedforaseat
withoutheightadjuster,
- thefullybackandhighestposition,
withthebackreststraightenedfora
seatwithheightadjuster.
135
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
135
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
CHILD SEAT AT THE REAR
Rearward facing
When a rearward facing child seat is
installed on a rear passenger seat,
move the vehicle's front seat forwards
andstraightenthebackrestsothatthe
rearward facing child seat does not
touchthevehicle'sfrontseat.
Forward facing
When a forward facing child seat is
installed on a rear passenger seat,
move the vehicle's front seat forwards
andstraightenthebackrestsothatthe
legs of the child in the forward facing
child seat do not touch the vehicle's
frontseat.
Ensure that the seat belt is
correctlytensioned.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensurethatthisisinrmcontactwith
theoor.
When a child seat is installed on a
passenger seat in row 3, put the
backrestsoftheouterandcentreseats
in row 2 forward of the seat occupied
by the child seat, in the table position,
orifthisisnotsufcient,rermovethe
seats in row 2 so that the child seat or
the the legs of the child do not touch
theseatsinrow2.
Seats in row 3
A child seat with a support leg
must never be installed on a
passenger seat in row 3.
136
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
136
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
DEACTIVATING THE
PASSENGER'S FRONT AIRBAG
Never install a rearward facing
child restraint system on a seat
protectedbyanactivefrontairbag.
This could cause the death of the child
orseriousinjury.
The warning label present on both
sides of the passenger's sun visor
repeatsthisadvice.Inlinewithcurrent
legislation, the following tables contain
this warning in all of the languages
required.
For information on deactivating
the passenger's front airbag, refer
to the "Airbags" section in this
chapter.
AR
BG
НИКОГАНЕинсталирайтедетскостолченаседалкасАКТИВИРАНАпреднаВЪЗДУШНАВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА.Товаможедапричини
СМЪРТилиСЕРИОЗНОНАРАНЯВАНЕнадетето.
CS
NIKDYneumisťujtedětskézádržnézařízeníorientovanésměremdozadunasedadlochráněnéAKTIVOVANÝMčelnímAIRBAGEM.Hrozí
nebezpečíSMRTIDÍTĚTEneboVÁŽNÉHOZRANĚNÍ.
DA
BrugALDRIGenbagudvendtbarnestolpåetsæde,dererbeskyttetafenAKTIVAIRBAG.BARNETrisikereratbliveALVORLIGTKVÆSTET
ellerDRÆBT.
DE
Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung, das
KindkönnteschwereodersogartödlicheVerletzungenerleiden.
EL
ΜηχρησιμοποιείτεΠΟΤΕπαιδικόκάθισμαμετηνπλάτητουπροςτοεμπρόςμέροςτουαυτοκινήτου,σεμιαθέσηπουπροστατεύεταιαπό
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟαερόσακοπουείναιΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ.ΑυτόμπορείναέχεισανσυνέπειατοΘΑΝΑΤΟήτοΣΟΒΑΡΟΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟτουΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
EN
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur
ES
NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un AIRBAG
frontalACTIVADO,yaquepodríacausarlesionesGRAVESoinclusolaMUERTEdelniño.
ET
ÄrgeMITTEKUNAGIpaigaldage“seljagasõidusuunas“lapseistetjuhikõrvalistmele,milleESITURVAPADIonAKTIVEERITUD.Turvapadja
avaneminevõiblastTÕSISELTvõiELUOHTLIKULTvigastada.
FI
ÄLÄKOSKAANasetalapsenturvaistuintaselkäajosuuntaanistuimelle,jonkaedessäsuojanaonkäyttöönaktivoituTURVATYYNY.Sen
laukeaminenvoiaiheuttaaLAPSENKUOLEMANtaiVAKAVANLOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR
NEJAMAISinstallerdesystèmederetenuepourenfantsfaisantfaceversl’arrièresurunsiègeprotégéparunCOUSSINGONFLABLEfrontal
ACTIVÉ.
Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR
NIKADAnepostavljatidječjusjedaliculeđimausmjeruvožnjenasjedalozaštićenoUKLJUČENIMprednjimZRAČNIMJASTUKOM.Tobimoglo
uzrokovatiSMRTiliTEŠKUOZLJEDUdjeteta.
HU
SOHAnehasználjonmenetiránynakháttalbeszereltgyermeküléstAKTIVÁLT(BEKAPCSOLT)FRONTLÉGZSÁKKALvédettülésen.Eza
gyermekHALÁLÁTvagySÚLYOSSÉRÜLÉSÉTokozhatja.
IT
NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
ATTIVATO.CiòpotrebbeprovocarelaMORTEoFERITEGRAVIalbambino.
LT
NIEKADAneįrenkitevaikoprilaikymopriemonėssuatgalatgręžtuvaikuantsėdynės,kurisaugomaVEIKIANČIOSpriekinėsOROPAGALVĖS.
IšsiskleidusoropagalveivaikasgalibūtiMIRTINAIarbaSUNKIAITRAUMUOTAS.
137
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
137
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
LV
NEKADNEuzstādietuzaizmugurivērstubērnusēdeklītipriekšējāpasažierasēdvietā,kurāirAKTIVIZĒTSpriekšējaisDROŠĪBASGAISA
SPILVENS.
TasvarizraisītBĒRNANĀVIvairadītNOPIETNUSIEVAINOJUMUS.
MT
Qattm’ghandekthallitifel/tiamarbutf’siggudahrulejnl-Airbagattiva,ghaliextista’tikkawzakorrimentserjujewankemewtlit-tifel/tia
NL
PlaatsNOOITeenkinderzitjemetderuginderijrichtingopeenzitplaatswaarvandeAIRBAGisINGESCHAKELD.Bijhetafgaanvandeairbag
kanhetKINDLEVENSGEVAARLIJKGEWONDRAKEN
NO
InstallerALDRIetbarnesetemedryggenmotkjøreretningenietsetesomerbeskyttetmedenfrontalAKTIVERTKOLLISJONSPUTE,BARNET
risikereråbliDREPTellerHARDTSKADET.
PL
NIGDYnieinstalowaćfotelikadziecięcegowpozycji"tyłemdokierunkujazdy"nasiedzeniuwyposażonymwCZOŁOWĄPODUSZKĘ
POWIETRZNĄwstanieAKTYWNYM.MożetodoprowadzićdoŚMIERCIDZIECKAlubspowodowaćuniegoPOWAŻNEOBRAŻENIACIAŁA.
PT
NUNCAinstaleumsistemaderetençãoparacriançasdecostasparaaestradanumbancoprotegidoporumAIRBAGfrontalACTIVADO.
EstainstalaçãopoderáprovocarFERIMENTOSGRAVESouaMORTEdaCRIANÇA.
RO
NuinstalatiNICIODATAunsistemderetinerepentrucopii,dispuscuspateleindirectiademers,peunlocdinvehiculprotejatcuAIRBAG
frontalACTIVAT.AceastaarputeaprovocaMOARTEACOPILULUIsauRANIREAluiGRAVA.
RU
ВОВСЕХСЛУЧАЯХЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯиспользоватьобращенноеназаддетскоеудерживающееустройствонасиденье,защищенном
ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙПОДУШКОЙБЕЗОПАСНОСТИ,установленнойпередэтимсиденьем.
ЭтоможетпривестикГИБЕЛИРЕБЕНКАилиНАНЕСЕНИЮЕМУСЕРЬЕЗНЫХТЕЛЕСНЫХПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK
NIKDYneinštalujtedetskézádržnézariadenieorientovanésmeromdozadunasedadlochránenéAKTIVOVANÝMčelnýmAIRBAGOM.Mohlo
bydôjsťkSMRTEĽNÉMUaleboVÁŽNEMUPORANENIUDIEŤAŤA.
SL
NIKOLInenameščajteotroškegasedežashrbtomvsmerivožnje,čejeVARNOSTNABLAZINApredsprednjimsopotnikovimsedežem
AKTIVIRANA.TakšnanamestitevlahkopovzročiSMRTOTROKAaliHUDEPOŠKODBE.
SR
NIKADAnekoristitedečjesedištekojeseokrećeunazadnasedištuzaštićenimAKTIVNIMVAZDUŠNIMJASTUKOMisprednjega,jermogu
nastupitiSMRTiliOZBILJNAPOVREDADETETA.
SV
PassagerarkrockkuddenframMÅSTEvaraavaktiveradomenbakåtvändbilbarnstolinstalleraspådennaplats.Annarsriskerarbarnetatt
DÖDASellerSKADASALLVARLIGT.
TR
KESİNLKLEHAVAYASTIĞIAKTİFolanönkoltuğayüzüarkayadönükbirçocukkoltuğuyerleştirmeyiniz.BuÇOCUĞUNÖLMESİNEveyaÇOK
AĞIRYARALANMASINAsebepolabilir.
138
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
138
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
139
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
139
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
RECOMMENDED SEATS
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
L1
"ROMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installedintherearwardfacingposition.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L4
"KLIPPAN Optima"
From22kg(about6years),theboosterisusedonitsown.
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Canbexedonthevehicle'sISOFIXmountings.
Thechildisrestrainedbytheseatbelt.
CITROËN offers a range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.
140
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
140
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
SEATS WITH A SUPPORT LEG
Caremustbetakenwheninstalling
a child seat with a support leg in
thevehicle.Inparticularyoushould
lookforthepresenceofastorage
compartment below the rear seat
footwells.
The centre rear seat does not have
a storage compartment below the
footwell.Youcanthereforeeasilyta
child seat with a support leg, whether
installed with the ISOFIX mountings or
usingthe3pointseatbelt.
Do not place the support leg on
the storage compartment cover;
itmightbreakinaseriousimpact.
Wheretheadjustmentsofthesupport
leg allow it, we suggest two other
possibilitiesforinstallation.
At the bottom of the storage
compartment
If the support leg is long enough, you
canadjustitsothatitcontactthe
bottomofthestoragecompartment.
Removeallobjectsfromthestorage
compartment before installing the
supportleg.
Away from the storage
compartment area
If the support leg is long enough and
canbeinclinedsufciently(always
by following the recommendations
given in the installation instructions for
the child seat), you can position the
supportlegsothatitcontactstheoor
awayfromthestoragecompartment.
Adjustthelongitudinalpositionof
the front or rear seat to obtain a
satisfactory position for the support leg
awayfromthestoragecompartment.
If you cannot position the support
leg in the way described, you
shouldnottachildseatwith
supportlegtotheseat.
141
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
141
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
LOCATIONS FOR CHILD SEATS SECURED WITH THE SEAT BELT
* A child seat with support leg must never be installed on an outer passenger seat in row 2, unless you are able to install it
inlinewiththerecommendationsunder"Installingachildseatwithasupportleg".
**Achildseatwithsupportlegmustneverbeinstalledonapassengerseatinrow3.
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using a seat belt
anduniversallyapproved(a)accordingtotheweightofthechildandtheseatinthevehicle.
U: seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt and universally approved, rearward facing
and/orforwardfacing.
Seat(s)
Weight of the child and indicative age
Under 13 kg
(groups 0 (b)
and 0+)
Up to approx 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg
(group 1)
1 to 3 years approx
From 15 to 25 kg
(group 2)
3 to 6 years approx
From 22 to 36 kg
(group 3)
6 to 10 years approx
Row 1 (c) (d)
Passenger
seat
U U U U
Row 2 (e)
(5and7seats)
Outer
seats
U* U* U U
Centre seat U U U U
Row 3 (f) (g)
(7seats)
All seats U** U** U U
142
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
142
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
(a)Universalchildseat:childseat
that can be installed in any vehicle
usingtheseatbelt.
(b)Group0:frombirthto10kg.
Cots and baby carriers cannot be
installed on the front passenger
seatorinrow3.Wheninstalledin
row 2, they may prevent the use of
oneormoreseatinthisrow.
(c) Refer to the legislation in force in
your country before installing your
childonthisseat.
(d) When a rearward facing child seat
is installed on a front passenger
seat, the passenger's front airbag
mustbedeactivated.Otherwise,
the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the
airbag is deployed.
When a forward facing child seat
is installed on a front passenger
seat, the passenger's front airbag
mustremainactive.
Remove and stow the heads
restraint, before installing a child
seatwithbackrestonapassenger
seat.
Rettheheadrestraintoncethechild
seathasbeenremoved.
(e) When a child seat is installed at
the rear, forward facing or rearward
facing, move the vehicle's seats
in the row in front forwards and
straightentheirbackreststoleave
enough space for the child seat or
thechild'slegs.
(f)Putthebackrestsoftheouterand
centre seats in row 2, located in
front of seat occupied by a child
seat, in the table position, or if this
isnotsufcient,removetheseatsin
row 2, so that the child seat or the
child's legs do not touch the seats in
row2.
(g) If the seats in row 3 are occupied,
do not leave a child seat installed
on the foldable row 2 seat, to allow
easyaccesstorow3.
143
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
143
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
ISOFIX MOUNTINGS
Your vehicle has been approved in
accordancewiththelatestISOFIXregulation.
The mountings comprise three rings for each
seat.
Two front rings A, located between
thevehicleseatbackrestandcushion,
indicatedbyamarking.
A rear ring B,locatedontheback
ofthevehicle'sseatbackrest,for
securing the upper strap referred to as
theTopTether.
The Top Tether is used to secure the
upper strap of child seats that have
one.Thisarrangementlimitsthe
forward tipping of the child seat in the
eventofafrontalimpact.
This ISOFIX mounting system
guarantees you fast, reliable and safe
ttingofthechildseatinyourvehicle.
TheISOFIXchildseatsarettedwith
two latches which are secured on the
two front rings A.
Some also have an upper strap which
is attached to the rear ring B.
Follow strictly the instructions for
ttingchildseatscontainedinthe
manufacturer'sinstallationguide.
To secure the child seat to the
TopTether:
- remove and stow the head restraint
before installing the child seat in
thisseatingposition(retitonce
the child seat has been removed),
- pass the upper strap of the child
seat over the top of the seat
backrest,betweentheaperturesfor
the head restraint rods,
- securethehookontheupperstrap
to the rear ring,
- tightentheupperstrap.
The incorrect installation of a child
seat in a vehicle compromises the
protection of the child in the event
ofanaccident.
Refer to the table for information on
the installation of ISOFIX child seats in
yourvehicle.
144
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
144
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
ThischildseatcanalsobeusedonseatswhicharenotttedwithISOFIX
mountings.
In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three point
seatbelt.
Follow the instructions for tting the child seat given in the seat
manufacturer's installation guide.
Recommended ISOFIX seat
"ISOFIX RÖMER DUO plus"
(size category B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installedonlyintheforwardfacingposition.
Secured to rings A, as well as ring B,
calledtheTopTether,usinganupperstrap.
Threeseatbodyangles:sitting,reclining,lying.
145
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
145
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
LOCATIONS FOR CHILD SEATS ISOFIX
*Inthe7seatversion,allthreeseats
in row 2 must be present when child
seatsareinstalled.
** A child seat with support leg must
never be installed on an outer
passenger seat in row 2, unless you
are able to install it in line with the
recommendations under "Installing a
childseatwithasupportleg".
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for the installation of ISOFIX child seats on the
vehicleseatsttedwithISOFIXmountings.
In the case of the universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the child seat's ISOFIX size category, determined by a
letter from A to G,isindicatedonthechildseatnexttothelogoISOFIX.
Weight of the child/indicativeage
Less than
10 kg
(group 0)
Up to 6 months
approx
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to 1 year approx
From 9 to 18 kg
(group 1)
From 1 to 3 years approx
Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat rearward facing
rearward
facing
forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Row 2
(5and7*seats)
Outer
seats**
IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IUF, IL-SU
Centre seat Not ISOFIX
Row 3
(7seats)
All seats Not ISOFIX
IUF: seat suitable for the installation
of an ISOFIX Universal child seat,
Forward facing and secured with an
upperstrap.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation
of a ISOFIX Semi-Universal child seat,
either.
- rearward facing equipped with an
upper strap or a support leg,
- forward facing equipped with a
support leg,
Remove and stow the head
restraint before installing a
childseatwithabackrestona
passengerseat.
Rettheheadrestraintoncethechild
seathasbeenremoved.
- a cot equipped with an upper strap
orasupportleg.
To attach the upper strap, refer to
chapter5,"ISOFIXmountings"section.
146
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
146
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
ADVICE ON CHILD SEATS
Attherear,alwaysleavesufcient
spacebetweenthefrontseatand:
- a rearward facing child seat,
- the feet of a child seated in a
forwardfacingchildseat.
For this, move the front seat forward
and, if necessary, straighten its
backrestaswell.
The incorrect installation of a child seat
in a vehicle compromises the child's
protectionintheeventofanaccident.
Checkthatthereisnoseatbeltorseat
beltbuckleunderthechildseat,asthis
coulddestabilisetheseat.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or
the child seat harnesses keeping the
slack relative to the child's body to a
minimum,evenforshortjourneys.
For the installation of a child seat using
the seat belt, ensure that the seat belt
is well tensioned on the child seat
and that it is holding the child seat
rmlyagainstthevehicle'sseat.Ifthe
passengerseatisadjustable,moveit
forwardifnecessary.
For the optimum installation of a
forward facing child seat, ensure that
thebackofthechildseatisascloseas
possibletothebackrestofthevehicle's
seat,orincontactifpossible.
The head restraint must be removed
before installing a child seat with a
backrestonthepassengerseat.
Ensure that the head restraint is
stowed or attached securely so that it
is not thrown around the vehicle in the
eventofsharpbraking.
Rettheheadrestraintassoonasthe
childseatisremoved.
Children at the front
The legislation on carrying a child on
thefrontpassengerseatisspecicto
eachcountry.Refertothelegislationin
forceinyourcountry.
Deactivate the passenger's airbag
when a rearward facing child seat is
installedonthefrontseat.
Otherwise,thechildwouldriskbeing
seriouslyinjuredorkillediftheairbag
weredeployed.
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must
be positioned on the child's shoulder
withouttouchingtheneck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passescorrectlyoverthechild'sthighs.
CITROËN recommends the use of a
boosterseatwhichhasaback,tted
withaseatbeltguideatshoulderlevel.
Asasafetyprecaution,neverleave:
- one or more children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle
which is exposed to the sun, with
the windows closed,
- thekeyswithinreachofchildren
insidethevehicle.
To prevent accidental opening of the
doors,usethe"ChildLock".
Takecarenottoopentherearwindows
bymorethanonethird.
To protect young children from the rays
ofthesun,tsideblindstotherear
windows.
For an installation in row 3, put the
backrestsoftheouterandcentre
seats in row 2 in the table position, or
remove these seats in row 2, so that
the child seat or the child's legs do not
touchtheseatsinrow2.
147
SAFETY
5
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
147
Child safety
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap05_Securite_ed02-2016
CHILD LOCK
This prevents opening of the siding
sidedoorsfromtheinside.
Manual
Electric
With the ignition on, press
this button in the middle of
thedashboard.
Indicator lamp on = child
lockon.
Pleasenote:thissystemis
independentofthecentrallocking
control.
Alwaysremovetheignitionkey
when leaving the vehicle, even for
ashorttime.
Itisadvisabletocheckthestateof
thechildlockeachtimetheignitionis
switchedon.
In the event of a serious impact the
electricchildlockisdeactivated
automatically.
A label indicates the position of the
leverandthestateofthechildlock.
- Open fully past the point of
resistance.
- Tilt the lever, located on the rear
sectionofthedoor.
148
Towing a trailer
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap06_Accessoire_ed02-2016
For more information about
weights and towed loads, refer to
chapter9,"Weights"section.
TOWING A TRAILER, A CARAVAN...
Distribution of loads
Distribute the load in the trailer so
thattheheaviestobjectsareas
close as possible to the axle and
the nose weight is close to the
maximum authorised without, however,
exceedingit.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases
thecoolanttemperature.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its
cooling capacity is not dependent on
theenginespeed.
You should therefore use a high gear
to lower the engine speed and reduce
yourspeed.
In all cases, pay attention to the
coolanttemperature.
Driving advice
Atowedvehiclemustfreewheel:
gearboxinneutral.
149
Towing a trailer
ACCESSORIES
6
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap06_Accessoire_ed02-2016
Good Practice
In certain cases of particularly arduous
use (towing the maximum load up a
steep slope in high temperatures), the
engineautomaticallylimitsitspower.
In this case, the air conditioning is
automatically cut off to save engine
power.
Tyres
Checkthetyrepressuresofthetowing
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
recommendedpressures.
Chapter7,"Levels"section.
If the coolant temperature
warning lamp comes on, stop
the vehicle and switch off the
engineassoonaspossible.
Brakes
Towingincreasesthebrakingdistance.
Drive at a moderate speed, change
downearlyandbrakegradually.
Towbar
We recommend the use of genuine
CITROËN towbars and their wiring
harnesses, which have been tested
and approved from the design stage of
your vehicle, and that you entrust the
ttingofthisequipmenttoaCITROËN
dealer.
Ifthisequipmentisnotttedbya
CITROËN dealer, it is imperative that
itisttedusingtheelectricalpre-
equipment installed at the rear of the
vehicle and in accordance with the
manufacturer'sinstructions.
In accordance with the general
instructions a reminder of which has
been given above, we draw your
attentiontotheriskassociatedwith
ttingatowbarorelectricalaccessory
notrecommendedbyCITROËN.
Fitting such equipment could result in
the failure of your vehicle's electronic
system.Pleaseobtaininformationfrom
theManufacturerbeforettingthistype
ofequipment.
Side wind
Sensitivitytosidewindisincreased.
Drive smoothly and at a moderate
speed.
ABS/DSC
The ABS or DSC systems only control
thevehicle,notthetrailerorcaravan.
Parking sensors
Therearparkingsensorssystemdoes
notfunctionwhilethevehicleistowing.
Chapter9,"Identication
markings"section.
150
Towing a trailer
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap06_Accessoire_ed02-2016
TOWBAR WITH SWAN NECK TOWBALL,
LOCKABLE AND QUICKLY
DETACHABLE
Presentation
Thisswannecktowbar,delivered
assembled,canberemovedandtted
easily.Notoolsareneeded.
Instructions for tting and before
every use
Checkthattheswanneckiscorrectly
lockedbyverifyingthefollowingpoints:
- thegreenmarkonthelocking
wheel is visible,
- thesafetylockonthelockingwheel
is directed toward the rear,
- thesafetylockisclosedandthe
keyremoved;thelockingwheelcan
no longer be operated,
- theswanneckmustnolonger
moveatallinitscarrier.
Whenhookingupthetrailer,don't
forgettoconnectthetrailerharness.
Fitting
151
Towing a trailer
ACCESSORIES
6
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap06_Accessoire_ed02-2016
During use
Neverunlockthedevicewhen
atrailerorloadcarrieristtedtothe
swanneck.
After use
Forjourneysmadewithoutatrailer
orloadcarrier,theswanneckmust
beremovedandtheblankingplug
insertedinthecarrier.Thismeasure
appliesparticularlyiftheswanneck
could hinder visibility of the number
plateorlighting.
Removal
Maintenance
Correct operation is only possible if the
swanneckanditscarrierremainclean.
Before cleaning the vehicle with a high
pressurejetwash,theswanneckmust
beremovedandtheblankingplug
insertedinthecarrier.
152
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap06_Accessoire_ed02-2016
Equipment
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap06_Accessoire_ed02-2016
OTHER ACCESSORIES
These accessories and parts, having been
tested and approved for reliability and
safety,arealladaptedtoyourvehicle.A
wide range of recommended accessories
andgenuinepartsisavailable.
A further range is also available,
structured around comfort, leisure and
maintenance:
Anti-theftalarm,windowetching,rst
aidkit,highvisibilityvest,frontand
rearparkingsensors,warningtriangle,
securityboltsforalloywheels,...
Seat covers compatible with airbags
for the front seats, bench seat, rubber
mats, carpet mats, snow chains, blinds,
tailgatebicyclecarrier,...
To prevent the mat from becoming
caughtunderthepedals:
- ensurethatthematanditsxings
are positioned correctly,
- nevertonematontopofanother.
Audioequipment,hands-freekit,
speakers,CDchanger,satellite
navigationsystem,USBbox,Videokit,...
Regardless of the audio and telematic
equipmentofferedonthemarket,the
technical constraints associated with
thettingofequipmentoftheseproduct
groups mean that the special features
of the equipment and its compatibility
with the capacities of your vehicle's
standardequipmentmustbetakeninto
account.PleaseaskaCITROËNdealer
formoreinformationbeforettingsuch
equipment.
Maximum weights on bars
- Transverse bars on longitudinal
bars:75Kg(thesebarsarenot
compatiblewiththeModutoproof).
Installing radiocommunication
transmitters
You are advised to contact a CITROËN
dealer before installing accessory
radiocommunication transmitters with
externalaerialonyourvehicle.
TheCITROËNdealernetwork
willinformyouofthespecication
(frequency band, maximum output
power,aerialposition,specic
conditions of installation) of the
transmitterswhichcanbetted,in
accordance with the Motor Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive(2004/104/EC).
Frontmudaps,rearmudaps,
15/17inchalloywheels,wheelarch
trim,leathersteeringwheel,...
Screenwash, interior and exterior
cleaning and maintenance products,
sparebulbs,...
Thettingofelectricalequipment
or accessories which are not
recommended by CITROËN may
result in a failure of your vehicle's
electronicsystem.Pleasenotethis
specicwarning.Youareadvised
to contact a dealer to be shown the
range of recommended equipment or
accessories.
Depending on the country in which
the vehicle is sold, it is compulsory
to have a high visibility vest, warning
triangle and spare bulbs available in
thevehicle.
153
CHECKS
7
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Maintenance with TOTAL
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
TOTAL & CITROËN
Partners in performance and
protecting the environment
Innovation in the search for
performance
For over 40 year, the TOTAL Research and
Development departments have developed
for CITROËN, lubricants to match the latest
technical innovations on CITROËN vehicles,
bothforcompetitionandforeverydaymotoring.
For you, this is an assurance that you will
obtain of the best performance from your
engine.
Optimum protection for your
engine
By having your CITROËN
vehicle serviced with TOTAL
lubricants, you are contributing
towards improving the life and
performance of your engine,
while also protecting the
environment.
prefers
154
Opening the bonnet
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
OPENING THE BONNET
Bonnet stay
Secure the stay in its location,
identiedbyastickerontheright-hand
side of the vehicle, to hold the bonnet
open.
Before closing the bonnet, put the stay
backinitsclipwithoutusingexcessive
force.
On the outside
Raise the bonnet slightly by reaching
inaathand,palmdown,tomake
accesstothelevereasier.
With this hand, push the safety catch
totheleft.Raisethebonnet.
On the inside
Pull the lever below the dashboard
towardsyou.Thebonnetisreleased.
To close
Lower the bonnet and release it at the
endofitstravel.Checkthatthebonnet
issecure.
Avoid opening the bonnet in strong
winds.
155
CHECKS
7
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Under the bonnet
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
PETROL ENGINE
1. Screenwashuidreservoir.
2. Fusebox.
3. Enginecoolantheadertank.
Batteryconnections:
+ Positiveterminal.
- Negativepoint(earth).
Takecarewhenworkingunderthebonnet.
4. Brakeandclutchuidreservoir.
5. Airlter.
6. Engineoildipstick.
7. Engineoilllercap.
8. Powersteeringuidreservoir.
156
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Under the bonnet
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
DIESEL ENGINE
4. Brakeandclutchuidreservoir.
5. Airlter.
6. Engineoildipstick.
7. Engineoilllercap.
8. Powersteeringuidreservoir.
9. Priming pump
(exceptBlueHDiengines).
1. Screenwashuidreservoir.
2. Fusebox.
3. Enginecoolantheadertank.
Batteryconnections:
+ Positiveterminal.
- Negativepoint(earth).
Takecarewhenworkingunderthebonnet.
157
CHECKS
7
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Levels
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
LEVELS
Oil change
This must be carried out at
theintervalsspeciedinthe
manufacturer'sservicingschedule.Ask
foradvicefromaCITROËNdealer.
Removethedipstickbeforelling.
Checkthelevelafterlling(never
exceedthemaxmark).
Rettheoilllercapbeforeclosingthe
bonnet.
Changing the brake fluid
Thebrakeuidmustbechangedat
the intervals stated, according to the
manufacturer'sservicingschedule.
Useuidsrecommendedbythe
manufacturer, which meet the DOT4
standard.
The level must be between the MIN
andMAXmarksonthereservoir.
Ifuidhastobeaddedfrequently,
this indicates a fault which must be
checkedbyaCITROËNdealeror
aqualiedworkshopassoonas
possible.
Warning lamps
Ifyouhavetoremove/retthe
engine style cover, handle it with
caretoavoiddamagingthexing
clips.
Oil level
It is recommended that the oil level be
checkedevery3000miles(5000km)
and topped up if necessary between oil
changes.
Checkthelevelwiththevehiclelevel,
enginecold,usingthedipstick.
Dipstick
Viscosity selection
In all cases, the oil selected must
meettherequirementsspeciedinthe
manufacturer'sserviceschedule.
These regular maintenance
operationswillkeepyourvehicle
ingoodworkingorder.Askfor
advice from a CITROËN dealer or refer
to the maintenance and warranty guide
inthehandbookpack.
Checksusingthewarning
lamps in the instrument panel
is described in chapter 3,
"Instruments and controls"
section.
Therearetwomarkson
thedipstick:
A = maximum
Ifyoullpastthismark,
contact a CITROËN
dealeroraqualied
workshop.
B = minimum
Never allow the level to
fallbelowthismark.
To maintain the reliability
of engines and emission
control systems, the use
of additives in engine oil
isprohibited.
158
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Levels
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Cooling system
Onlyusetheuidrecommendedbythe
manufacturer.
Otherwise,youriskseriouslydamaging
yourengine.
When the engine is warm, the
temperature of the coolant is controlled
bytheenginefan.Asthisfancan
operatewiththeignitionkeyremoved
and because the cooling system is
pressurised, wait for at least one hour
after the engine has stopped before
carryingoutanywork.
Slackenthecapby1/4ofaturnto
release the pressure to prevent any
riskofscalding.Whenthepressure
has dropped, remove the cap and top
upthelevelwithcoolant.
Ifuidhastobeaddedfrequently,
this indicates a fault which must be
checkedbyaCITROËNdealeras
soonaspossible.
Power steering fluid level
Thevehiclemustbeparkedonlevel
groundwiththeenginecold.Unscrew
the cap integrated with the gauge and
checkthelevelwhichmustbebetween
theMINandMAXmarks.
Inordertoregeneratethelter,you
are advised to drive at a speed higher
than40mph(60km/h)foratleastve
minutes as soon as possible, when
trafcconditionspermit(untilthe
message disappears and the service
warninglampgoesoff).
During regeneration of the particle
emissionlter,thenoiseofarelay
operating may be heard under the
dashboard.
If the message is still displayed and
if the service warning lamp remains
on, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshop.
Topping up
The level must be between the MIN
andMAXmarksontheexpansion
bottle.Ifmorethan1litreofuidis
required to top up the level, have the
systemcheckedbyaCITROËNdealer
oraqualiedworkshop.
Screenwash level
For best quality cleaning and for your
safety, we would advise that you use
productsoftheCITROËNrange.
For optimum cleaning and to avoid
freezing,thisuidmustnotbetopped
uporreplacedwithplainwater.
Capacityofthescreenwashreservoir:
approximately3litres.
Diesel additive level
(Diesel with particle
filter)
Topping up
This additive must be topped up by
aCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshopwithoutdelay.
Waste products
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil
withtheskin.
Brakeuidisharmfultohealthand
verycorrosive.
Donotdisposeofusedoil,brakeuid
or coolant into drains or into the ground
but into the containers dedicated to this
use at a CITROËN dealer (France) or
anauthorisedwastedisposalsite.
The minimum level of this additive
is indicated by lighting of the service
warning lamp, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the
screen.
When this occurs with the engine
running it is due to the start of
saturationoftheparticlelter
(exceptionally prolonged urban type
drivingconditions:lowspeed,long
trafcjams,...).
159
CHECKS
7
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Checks
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
CHECKS
Carbon filter and passenger compartment filter
Particle filter (Diesel)
Maintenanceoftheparticleltermust
becarriedoutbyaCITROËNdealer.
On acceleration after the vehicle has
been running for a prolonged period
at very low speed or at idle, you may,
in exceptional circumstances, notice
the emission of water vapour at the
exhaust.Thiswatervapourdoesnot
have any adverse effect on vehicle
handlingortheenvironment.
Battery
At the start of summer or winter, have
yourbatterycheckedbyaCITROËN
dealeroraqualiedworkshop.
Brake pads
Brakepadweardependsonthestyle
of driving, in particular for vehicles
which are used in town, over short
distances.Itmaybenecessaryto
checkthethicknessofthepads,even
betweenservices.
Unlessthereisaleakonthecircuit,a
dropinthebrakeuidlevelindicates
thatthebrakepadsareworn.
Brake disc / drum wear
Forinformationoncheckingthebrake
disc/drumwear,contactaCITROËN
dealer.
Parking brake
Wheretheparkingbraketravelistoo
great or there is a reduction in the
performanceofthesystem,theparking
brakeshouldbeadjusted,evenbetween
services.
HavethesystemcheckedbyaCITROËN
dealeroraqualiedworkshop.
Oil filter
Changethelterregularlyin
accordance with the manufacturer's
servicingschedule.
Anaccessapallowsreplacementof
thelters.
Thecarbonlterpermitscontinuous
andeffectivelteringofdust.
Ifthepassengercompartmentlter
becomesblocked,thismayreducethe
performance of the air conditioning
system and generate unpleasant
odours.
We recommend the use of a combined
passengercompartmentlter.By
means of its second special active
lter,itcontributestothepurication
of the air breathed by the occupants
and the cleanness of the passenger
compartment (reduction of allergic
symptoms, unpleasant odours and
greasydeposits).
Refer to theservicing and warranty
bookletforthereplacementintervalfor
thesecomponents.
Depending on the environment (dusty
atmosphere...)andtheuseofthe
vehicle(urbandriving...),changethem
twiceasoftenifnecessary.
160
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Checks
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Good practice
Bleeding water from the Diesel
filter
Manual gearbox
Havethelevelcheckedinaccordancewith
themanufacturer'sservicingschedule.
In order to avoid damaging the
electrical units, we strongly
advise you not to use high
pressure washing to clean the engine
compartment.
After washing the vehicle dampness,
orinwinter,icemayformonthebrake
discsandpads:brakingefciencymay
bereduced.Makesomelightbrake
applications to dry and de-ice the
brakes.
If this warning lamp comes
on,bleedthelter.Otherwise
bleed regularly each time the
engineoilischanged.
HDi engines use advanced
technology.Allworkrequires
special training, so should be
entrustedtoaCITROËNdealer.
Dependingoncountryofsale.
To drain the water, unscrew the bleed
screwlocatedonthelter.
Operate until all of the water no longer
owsinthetransparentpipe,then
tightenthebleedscrew.
Only use products recommended by
CITROËN or products of equivalent
qualityandspecication.
In order to optimise the operation
ofunitsasimportantasthebraking
system, CITROËN selects and offers
specicproducts.
161
CHECKS
7
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Fuel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
REFUELLING
Low fuel level
Filling
Thefueltankmustbelledwith the
engine off.
- Openthefuelllerap.
- Insertthekey,thenturnitaquarter
turn.
- Removethecapandhookitonto
the clip located on the inside of the
ap.
Whenllingwithfuel,
a mechanical system prevents
openingoftheleft-handsidedoor.
Whenthefuelllerapisopen,ensure
thatnoonetriestoslidethisdoor.
Oncetheaphasbeenclosed,the
slidingsidedoormayjam,pushthe
doortocloseitthenopenit.
When the low fuel level is
reached, this warning lamp
comeson.
Alabelafxedtotheinsideoftheap
reminds you of the type of fuel to be
used.
Youmustllwithatleast5litresoffuel
forittoberegisteredbythefuelgauge.
Whenthefuelllercapisopened,
theremaybeaslightinrushofair.This
vacuum is entirely normal and is due to
thesealingofthefuelsystem.
Whenllingthefueltank,donot
continue after the 3
rd
cut-off of the
nozzle.Thiscouldcausemalfunctions.
Thecapacityofthefueltankis
approximately 60 litres (or 55 litres
accordingtoversion).
- Afterllingthefueltank,lockthe
capandclosetheap.
You then have approximately 8 litres
offuelremaining.
Fill up without delay to avoid running
outoffuel.
Neverriskdrivinguntilyourunoutof
fuel as this may damage the emissions
controlandinjectionsystems.
162
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Fuel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Travelling abroad
Certain fuels could damage the
engine of your vehicle. In certain
countries, the use of a particular
fuel may be required (specic
octane rating, specic sales
name…) to ensure correct operation
of the engine.
For any additional information, contact
yourdealer.
Fuel used for petrol engines
The petrol engines are compatible with
bio-fuels that conform to current and
future European standards and can be
obtainedfromllingstations:
- Petrol that meets the EN228
standard, mixed with a bio-fuel
meetingtheEN15376standard.
The only petrol additives
authorised for use are those
thatmeettheB715001
standard.
Fuel used for Diesel engines
The Diesel engines are compatible
with biofuels that conform to current
and future European standards and
canbeobtainedfromllingstations:
- Diesel fuel that meets
standard EN590 mixed
with a biofuel that meets
standard EN14214
(possibly containing up
to7%FattyAcidMethyl
Ester),
The use of B20 or B30 fuel
meetingstandardEN16709
is possible in your Diesel
engine.However,thisuse,
even occasional, requires
strict application of the
special servicing conditions
referred to as "Arduous
conditions".
- Diesel fuel that meets
standardEN16734
mixed with a biofuel
that meets standard
EN14214 (possibly
containing up to 10 %
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester),
For more information, contact a
CITROËNdealeroraqualiedworkshop.
- ParafnicDieselfuel
that meets standard
EN15940 mixed with
a biofuel that meets
standard EN14214
(possibly containing up
to7%FattyAcidMethyl
Ester).
The use of any other type of (bio)
fuel (vegetable or animal oils,
pureordiluted,domesticfuel...)
isstrictlyprohibited(riskofdamageto
theengineandfuelsystem).
The only Diesel additives
authorised for use are those that
meettheB715000standard.
163
CHECKS
7
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
AdBlue
®
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
DIESEL PRIMING
PUMP
If you run out of fuel, it is necessary to
primethefuelcircuit.
Other HDi engines
- Fillthefueltankwithatleastve
litresofDiesel.
- Squeeze and release the manual
priming pump, under the bonnet,
undertheprotectivecover.
- Operate the starter until the engine
starts.
BlueHDi engine
- Fillthefueltankwithatleastve
litresofDiesel.
- Switch on the ignition (without
startingtheengine).
- Wait around 6 seconds and switch
offtheignition.
- Repeattheoperation10times.
- Operate the starter to run the
engine.
FUEL CUT-OFF
In a serious collision, a mechanism
automatically prevents fuel from
reachingtheengine.
Theashingofthiswarning
lamp is accompanied by a
messageinthescreen.
Checkthatthereisnoodouror
leakageoffueloutsidethevehicleand
re-establishthefuelsupply:
- switch off the ignition
(STOP position),
- removethekey,
- putthekeybackintheignition,
- switchontheignitionandstart.
164
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
AdBlue
®
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
BLUEHDI AND ADBLUE
®
SCR technology
AdBlue
®
is the brand name of the
solution needed for operation of the
SCRsystem.
The aim of BlueHDi is to reduce the
emissions of NOx (nitrous oxides) in
the air by up to 90%, using a system
that converts NOx into water vapour
and nitrogen in a dedicated catalytic
converter:SCR(SelectiveCatalytic
Reduction).
Thisobjectivemeetsthe"Euro6"
emissions standard adopted by the
European Union aimed at limiting the
emissions of pollutants from internal
combustionengines.
The SCR technology used on BlueHDi
enginesinvolvestheinjectionof
AdBlue
®
intotheexhaustsystem.
BlueHDivehicleshaveaspecic
AdBlue
®
additivetankwithacapacity
of 17 litres.
Ithasanexteriorllerwithablue ller
cap, located to the left of the Diesel
fuelllercap.
Filling of the AdBlue
®
tankcanbe
done using 5 or 10 litre containers,
1.89litrebottles,orwhenatafuel
llingstationequippedwithaspecial
AdBlue
®
delivery pump for light
vehicles.
This operation can also be carried
out by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshop.
Please note that the high delivery
pumpsatsomellingstations,
intended only for lorries and coaches,
are not suitable for cars or light
commercialvehicles.
Neverusethesepumps.
165
CHECKS
7
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
AdBlue
®
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Good practice
While the quantity of AdBlue
®
in
theadditivetankissufcient,no
informationisdisplayed.
Ontheotherhand,oncetheuid
level drops to the quantity needed
forarangeof1500miles(2400km)
driving, you are warned by different
temporary signals (warning lamp,
message,audiblesignal).
As more miles are covered, these
signals intensify and the message
becomespermanent.
When the AdBlue
®
tankisempty,
restartingbecomesimpossible.
It is strongly recommended that you
do not wait for the successive alerts
before topping-up the AdBlue
®
additive,
butdothisassoonaspossible.
Filling the AdBlue
®
tank
For light vehicles, 5 or 10 litre
containersand1.89litre
(1/2USgallon)bottlesareavailable
from CITROËN dealers, until they are
equipped with AdBlue
®
deliverypumps.
IfyouwanttolltheAdBlue
®
tank
yourself, ensure that you have a
suitablellerpipe,whichmayormay
not be supplied with the additive
container.
166
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
AdBlue
®
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Range indicators
Rules on the display of alerts
For more information on the
displays and warning lamps, refer
to chapter 3, "Instruments and
controls"section.
Range greater than 1 500 miles
(2 400 km)
Noinformationdisplayed.
Oncethe1500miles(2400km)
threshold is reached, the UREA
warning lamp comes on temporarily
and the remaining range message is
displayed.
The alert is repeated every 200 miles
(300km)untilthenextthresholdis
reached.
Every time the ignition is switched
on, the alert is given, together with an
audiblesignal.
Remaining range less than
1 500 miles (2 400 km) and greater
than 350 miles (600 km)
Driving range
Withthetouchscreentablet:
If the range is greater than 3 100 miles
(5000km),arangevalueisnotgiven.
Press this button to display
theinformation.
- select the "Driving
assistance" menu,
- select "Diagnostic",
- selectCHECK.
Different levels of alert are triggered
according to the remaining driving
range threshold
You will be informed as each mileage
threshold is reached and the alerts will
changefromtemporarytopermanent.
- The 1
st
is triggered at a remaining
driving range of 1 500 miles
(2400km).
- The 2
nd
is triggered at a remaining
driving range of 350 miles
(600km).
- Up to 0 miles, at which point it will
be impossible to restart the engine
afterastop.
167
CHECKS
7
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
AdBlue
®
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Oncethe350miles(600km)threshold
is reached, the UREA warning lamp
ashesandtheServicewarninglamp
comes on, accompanied by a message
ontheremainingdrivingrange.
The alert is repeated every 30 seconds
with an update of the remaining driving
rangeinstepsof30miles(50km)
travelled.
Every time the ignition is switched
on, the alert is given together with an
audiblesignal.
At 0 miles the system installed in
the vehicle to meet the emissions
standard will prevent engine
starting.
Your vehicle's exhaust emissions no
longer meet the "Euro 6" standard and
theenginewillnotstart.
To be able to restart the vehicle, you
must add at least 4 litres of AdBlue
®
.
- Pourtheadditiveintothetank(by
thellerwiththebluecap).
- Switch on the ignition without
starting.
- Wait 10 seconds before starting the
engine.
Remaining range less than 350 miles
(600 km) and more than 0 miles
Starting prevented, breakdown related
to a lack of AdBlue
®
in the special tank
The0uidlevelhasbeenreached.
Avoid waiting until the
remaining range is 0 miles!
The alert is repeated when driving until
the AdBlue
®
tankhasbeentopped-up
withsufcientadditive.
Unless the additive in the special
additivetankistopped-up,yourisk
immobilisationofthevehicle.
Followingthis,makeafurtherll
tothespecialadditivetank,the
capacity of which is 17 litres.
Fault with the SCR system
The UREA, Service and diagnostic
warninglampscomeson.
Every time the ignition is switched on,
theemissionsfaultisconrmedbyan
audiblesignalandamessage.
If it is a temporary fault, the alert
disappears as soon as the exhaust
emissions return to the levels required
bythestandard.
Detection
On the other hand, if the warning
lamps are still on after 30 miles
(50km)ofdriving,thefaultis
conrmed.
An engine start prevention system
will be activated automatically after
650miles(1100km)travelled
followingthisconrmation.
GotoaCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshop.
Or go to a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshop.
168
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
AdBlue
®
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Fault conrmed
In addition to the previous signals,
theUREAwarninglampashesand
the remaining range allowed will be
displayedinmiles(kilometres).
The alert will be repeated every
30 seconds with an update of the
driving range in steps of 30 miles
(50km).
GotoaCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshopassoonaspossible.
Yourisknotbeingabletostartthe
engine.
Starting prevented, having
covered the 650 miles (1 100 km)
At each attempt at starting, the alert is
activated and the message "Emissions
fault:Startingprevented"isdisplayed.
Refilling / Topping-up the
AdBlue
®
Precautions to take
Use only AdBlue
®
that meets the
ISO22241standard.
The AdBlue
®
uidisanurea-based
solution.
Thisuidisnon-ammable,colourless
andodourless.
Tobekeptinacoolarea.
Containers (5 or 10 litres) and
bottles (1.89 litres) of AdBlue
®
Pleasechecktheuse-bydate.
Readtheinstructionsonthelabel.
Ensure that you have a suitable
llerpipe,whichmayormaynotbe
suppliedwiththecontainer.
Intheeventofanoverow,wipe
aroundthellermouthusinga
dampcloth.
If any AdBlue
®
uidissplitorsplashed
on to you, wash immediately with cold
water or wipe yourself with a clean
dampcloth.
Iftheuidhascrystallised,cleanitoff
usingaspongeandhotwater.
Tofacilitatelling,anadaptoris
availablefromCITROËNdealers.
169
CHECKS
7
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
AdBlue
®
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap07_Verication_ed02-2016
Filling
Ensurethatthevehicleisparkedona
atandlevelsurface.
Pourthecontentsofthecontainer/
bottleintothededicatedtank.
AfterllingtheAdBlue
®
tank,observe
thefollowingprocedure:
- Switch on the ignition without
starting.
- Wait 10 seconds before starting the
engine.
Never dispose of empty AdBlue
®
containers and bottles in the
householdwaste.
Place them in a special container
providedthispurposeortakethemto
yourdealer.
Keep AdBlue
®
out of the
reach of children, in its original
container.
Never transfer AdBlue
®
to another
container:itwouldlooseitspurity.
Neverdilutetheuidwithwater.
NeverpourtheuidintotheDieselfuel
tank.
Recommendations on storage
Never store containers or bottles of
AdBlue
®
inyourvehicle.
Freezing of the AdBlue
®
AdBlue
®
freezesatabout-11°C(12.2°F)
anddeterioratesabove25°C(77°F).
It is recommended that containers and
bottles be stored in a cool area and
protectedfromdirectsunlight.
Undertheseconditions,theuidcan
bekeptforatleastayear.
Additive that has been frozen can
be used once it has thawed out in
ambientair.
The SCR system includes an
AdBlue
®
tankheaterthatensures
operation of the vehicle in normal
conditions.
In exceptional situations, such as when
thevehicleiskeptattemperatures
below -15°C (5°F) for a long period,
there may be an emission fault alert
related to freezing of the AdBlue
®
additive.
Parkthevehicleinanareaatamore
moderate temperature for a few hours
until the AdBlue
®
becomesauid
again.
The emissions warning lamp does not
go off immediately, but does so after a
fewmilesofdriving.
170
Battery
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
BATTERY
Before disconnecting the battery, you
must wait for 2 minutes after switching
offtheignition.
Never disconnect a terminal when the
engineisrunning.
Neverchargeabatterywithoutrst
disconnectingtheterminals.
After every reconnection of the battery,
switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute
before starting to allow the electronic
systemstobeinitialised.Ifproblems
remain after doing this, please contact
aCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshop.
After changing bulbs, wait
approximately 3 minutes before
reconnectingthebattery.
It is advisable to disconnect the
battery if the vehicle is not to be
used for a period of more than
onemonth.
To charge the battery using a
battery charger
- Disconnectthebattery.
- Follow the instructions for use
given by the battery charger
manufacturer.
- Reconnect starting with the
negative(-)terminal.
- Checkthattheterminalsand
connectorsareclean.Iftheyare
covered with sulphate (white or
greenish deposit), disconnect them
andcleanthem.
To start the vehicle from
another battery
- Connect the red cable to the
positive (+) terminals of the
twobatteries.
- Connect one end of the green
orblackcabletothenegative(-)
terminaloftheslavebattery.
- Connect the other end of the green
orblackcabletoanearthpointon
thebrokendownvehicleasfaras
possiblefromthebattery.
- Operatethestarter,lettheenginerun.
- Wait for the engine to return to idle,
thendisconnectthecables.
The presence of this label
indicates the use of a 12 V
lead-acid battery with special
technologyandspecication,forwhich
the involvement of a CITROËN dealer
orqualiedworkshopisrequiredwhen
replacingordisconnectingthebattery.
Failure to observe this recommendation
may cause premature wear of the
battery.
Afterrettingthebattery,theStop&
Start system will only be active after
several hours depending on the
climatic conditions and the state of
charge of the battery (up to about
8hours).
The Stop & Start battery does not have
tobedisconnectedforcharging.
171
Battery
QUICK HELP
8
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
ECONOMY MODE
After the engine has stopped, with
thekeyintheignitionposition,certain
functions (windscreen wiper, electric
windows, courtesy lamps, audio
equipment,etc.)canonlybeusedfora
cumulative duration of thirty minutes, to
preventdischargingofthebattery.
Once the thirty minutes have elapsed,
the active functions are put on standby
andthebatterywarninglampashes
accompanied by a message in the
screen.
To resume the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and let it
runforafewminutes.
The time available will then be double
the time for which the engine was left
running.However,thistimewillalways
bebetweenveandthirtyminutes.
Aatbatterywillpreventthe
enginefromstarting.
172
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a wheel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Thetemporarytyrerepairkitconsists
of a compressor and a bottle
(containingasealant).
Using the kit
- Tickthedeatedwheelonthe
speedlimitationstickerthenafx
thestickertothevehicle'ssteering
wheel to remind you that a wheel is
intemporaryuse.
- Clip the bottle 1 on the
compressor 2.
- Connect the bottle 1 to the valve of
thetyretoberepaired.
- Takecaretounwindthe
compressor pipe before connecting
ittothebottle.
- Connect the power lead to one of
thevehicle's12Vsockets.
- Switch on the compressor by
pressing button A until the tyre
pressurereaches2.0bars.Ifthis
pressure cannot be reached, the
tyrecannotberepaired.
- Removeandstorethecompressor.
- Drive immediately, for a few miles
(kilometres),atreducedspeed,to
llthepuncture.
- Adjustthepressureusingthe
compressor in accordance with the
recommendation for the vehicle and
checkthattheleakislledcorrectly
(nofurtherlossofpressure).
- Drive at reduced speed (50 mph
[80km/h]).Thetyremustbe
examined and repaired by a
specialistassoonaspossible.
After use, the bottle can be stored in
aplasticbag,suppliedinthekit,to
avoid staining your vehicle with traces
ofuid.
Warning:thesealantproductis
harmful if swallowed and causes
irritationtotheeyes.
Keepitoutofreachofchildren.
After use, do not discard the bottle into
theenvironment,takeittoaCITROËN
dealer or to an specialised waste
disposalsite.
Replacement bottles of sealant are
availablefromCITROËNdealers.
TEMPORARY PUNCTURE
REPAIR KIT
Thekitislocatedinoneofthe
two storage compartments located
underthefrontseats.
Vehicles supplied with a temporary
puncturerepairkitdonothaveaspare
wheelortooling(jack,wheelbrace,...).
173
QUICK HELP
8
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a wheel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
1. Parking the vehicle
- The occupants must get out of the
vehicleandwaitinasafelocation.
- Ifpossible,parkthevehicleon
level, stable and non-slippery
ground.
- Applytheparkingbrake,switch
offtheignitionandengagerstor
reversegear.
- Placeachockunderthewheel
diagonally opposite the one to be
changed.
CHANGING A WHEEL
under the passenger footwell behind
thedriver'sseat.
- If necessary, move the seat forward
to access the storage compartment
fromtherear.
- Removetheapthentakeoutthe
jackandthetoolcarrier.
- Remove the tools needed from the
carrier.
1. Jack.
2. Wheelbrace.
3. Chock.
4. Spanner for the Modutop roof bars
andrearlamps.
5. Alloywheeltrimremovaltool.
6. Towingeye.
Ifthevehicleisttedwithatowbar,
it is sometimes necessary to raise
thevehicleslightlytomakeiteasier
to remove the spare wheel from its
carrier.
2. Tools
The tools are stowed in a storage area
closedbyaapunderafrontseat.
However, if the vehicle is not equipped
with a spare wheel, the towing eye is
located in the storage compartment
Oncertaintypesofgroundand/
or if considerable loads are being
transported, call a CITROËN dealer or
aqualiedworkshop.
Thejackandtoolsarespecictoyour
vehicle.Donotusethemforother
purposes.
174
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a wheel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
3. Spare wheel
- Unscrew the bolt using the
wheelbrace until the carrier is
loweredfully.
- Open the rear doors to gain access
tothesparewheel.
- Detachthecarrierfromthehook
and place the spare wheel near the
wheeltobechanged.
175
QUICK HELP
8
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a wheel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
4.
Removing the wheel with punctured tyre
- Positionthefootofthejackonthe
ground and ensure that it is directly
belowthefrontorrearjacking
point provided on the underbody,
whichever is closest to the wheel to
bechanged.
- Extendthejackuntilitshead
comesintocontactwiththejacking
point used; the vehicle's contact
area A must be engaged with the
headofthejack.
- Raise the vehicle until there is
sufcientspacebetweenthewheel
and the ground, so that the (not
punctured) spare wheel can be
easilytted.
- Resume and complete the
unscrewingofthewheelbolts.
- Remove the bolts and remove the
wheel.
- Removethewheeltrim.
- Loosen the wheel bolts and start
unscrewingthem.
Ensurethatthejackisstable,thefoot
ofthejackmustbeincontactwiththe
ground,anddirectlybelowthejacking
pointused.
If the ground is slippery or loose, the
jackmayslipordrop-Riskofinjury!
Ensurethatthejackispositionedonly
atoneofthejackingpointsunderthe
vehicle,makingsurethatthevehicle's
contact surface is centred on the head
ofthejack.
Otherwisethereisariskofdamage
tothevehicleand/orofthejack
dropping-Riskofinjury!
Donotextendthejackuntilyouhave
started unscrewing the bolts on the
wheel to be changed and have placed
thechockunderthewheeldiagonally
opposite.
176
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a wheel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
When using the non-uniform spare
wheel, do not exceed a speed of
50mph(80km/h).
The spare wheel is not designed to
beusedoverlongdistances.Have
the tightening of the bolts and the tyre
pressurecheckedbyaCITROËN
dealeroraqualiedworkshopassoon
aspossible.
Have the original wheel repaired
andrettedbyaCITROËNdealer
oraqualiedworkshopassoonas
possible.
5. Fitting the spare wheel
- Position the wheel on the hub and
starttighteningtheboltsbyhand.
- Carry out an initial tightening of the
boltsusingthewheelbrace.
- Lower the vehicle completely by
foldingthejack,thenremovethe
jack.
- Tighten the bolts again using the
wheelbrace, tighten them fully
withoutforcingthem.
- Place the wheel to be repaired in
thecarrier.
- Securethecarrieronthehookthen
raise the carrier by tightening the
boltwiththewheelbrace.
- Fullytightenthebolt,thencheck
thatthewheelisheldatagainst
theoor.
If this is not the case, repeat the
operation.
Never go underneath a vehicle
thatissupportedonlybyajack
(useastand).
Never use a power driver in place of
thewheelbrace.
177
QUICK HELP
8
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a wheel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
FITTING THE WHEEL
TRIM
The tyre valve must be centred in the
wheeltrimcut-out.
Thispositionisessentialforttingthe
wheeltrimcorrectlyonthesteelwheel.
(If the valve is not correctly aligned with
the cut-out, the anti-rotation system
will be in contact with the heads of the
wheelboltsandrisksbeingdamaged
iftheuserpersistsinttingthewheel
triminthisincorrectposition).
- Ensure that all of the clips are
engaged except the last one
(oppositethevalvehole).
- Strikethewheeltrimwiththepalm
of your hand, opposite the valve
intheareaofthelastxingclip
(alwaysinthedirectionofclipping).
- Ensure that the outer edge of
the wheel trim is not deformed or
pushedintothewheel:
● Correct position for the edge of
thewheeltrim.
● Incorrect position for the edge of
thewheeltrim.
Refer to the "Instruments and
controls" section of chapter 3,
"Tyreunder-inationdetection"
part, for recommendations after
changingawheelttedwithatyre
under-inationdetectionsensor.
Refertothe"Identication
markings"sectionofchapter9to
locatethetyrelabel.
6. Refitting the repaired wheel
Thewheelisrettedasdescribedin
step5,notforgettingtoretthewheel
trim.
178
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a wheel
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Check the position of the tyre
valve relative to the ring of the
wheel trim.
Valve not positioned correctly:below
thering.
Observe the wheel trim tting
procedure, so as to avoid
breaking the xing clip and
deformation at the edge of the
wheel trim.
Deformation of the edge of the wheel
trimatthevalve,becauseitistted
incorrectly.
Valve positioned correctly:belowthe
ring.
179
QUICK HELP
8
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Snow screen
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
REMOVABLE SNOW SCREEN
(BLANKING COVER)
According to country, the removable
snow screen is installed on the lower
part of the front bumper to prevent the
accumulation of snow at the radiator
coolingfan.
Fitting
Removal
- Offer up the snow screen facing its
centring pin Aonthefrontbumper.
- Put it in place by pressing at each
clip Blocatedinthefourcorners.
Do not forget to remove the
snow screen when the exterior
temperature is higher than 10°C
(noriskofsnowfall)andwhen
towing.
- Pass a screwdriver into the hole
locatedneareachoftheclips.
- Use the screwdriver as a lever to
unclip the four clips Binturn.
180
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Snow chains
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
SNOW CHAINS
In wintry conditions, snow chains
improve traction as well as the
behaviourofthevehiclewhenbraking.
Thesnowchainsmustbetted
onlytothedrivingwheels.They
mustneverbettedto"space-
saver"typesparewheels.
Takeaccountofthelegislationin
force in your country on the use
of snow chains and the maximum
runningspeedauthorised.
Advice on installation
F Ifyouhavetotthechainsduring
ajourney,stopthevehicleonaat
surfaceonthesideoftheroad.
F Applytheparkingbrakeand
positionanywheelchocksto
preventmovementofyourvehicle.
F Fit the chains following the
instructions provided by the
manufacturer.
F Move off gently and drive for a
few moments, without exceeding
30mph(50km/h).
F Stopyourvehicleandcheckthat
the snow chains are correctly
tightened.
It is recommended that before you
leave,youpractisettingthesnow
chainsonalevelanddrysurface.
Use only the chains designed to be
ttedtothetypeofwheelttedtoyour
vehicle:
For more information on snow chains,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshop.
Original
tyre size
Maximumlink
size.
195/65R15
9 mm
195/70R15
205/65R15
215/55R16
215/50R17
Avoid driving with chains on roads
that have been cleared of snow,
to avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres
andtheroadsurface.Ifyourvehicle
isttedwithalloywheels,checkthat
nopartofthechainoritsxingsisin
contactwiththewheelrim.
181
QUICK HELP
8
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a bulb
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
CHANGING A BULB
Type A
Allglassbulb:pullgently
asitisttedbypressure.
Type C
Halogenbulb:releasethe
retaining spring from its
housing.
Type B
Bayonetbulb:press
on the bulb then turn it
anticlockwise.
Types of bulb
Varioustypesofbulbarettedtoyour
vehicle.
Toremovethem:
Type D
Light-emitting diode
(LED):forreplacement
of the daytime running
lamps, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a
qualiedworkshop.
182
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a bulb
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
2. Sidelamps
Type A, W5W - 5W
- Remove the cover by pulling the
exiblerubbertab.
- Removethebulbholderttedby
pressurebypullingtheconnector.
- Changethebulb.
- Ensurethatthecoverisretted
correctly all round to assure correct
sealing.
Front lamps
1. Dipped / Main beam headlamps
Type C, H4 - 55W
- Remove the centre cover by pulling
theexiblerubbertab.
- Disconnecttheelectricalconnector.
- Releasetheretainingtab.
- Changethebulbtakingcare
to align the metal part with the
groovesonthelamp.
- Repositiontheretainingtab.
- Ensurethatthecoverisretted
correctly all round to assure correct
sealing.
High pressure washing
Openthebonnet.Toaccessthebulbs,
reachbehindtheheadlampunit.
Carry out the operations in reverse
ordertoreteachbulbandcheckthat
thebonnetisclosedsecurely.
Halogen bulbs must be changed
withtheheadlampoff.Waitafew
minutes(riskofseriousburns).
Do not touch the bulb directly with your
ngers,uselint-freecloths.
It is normal for condensation to form
insidetheheadlamps.Regularuseof
thevehicleeliminatesthismisting.
The bulbs must be changed with
the ignition off or with the battery
disconnected.Waitapproximately
3 minutes after changing the bulb
beforereconnectingthebattery.
Checkthatthelampsoperatecorrectly
aftereachoperation.
When using this type of washing
on stubborn dirt, do not persist on
the headlamps, the lamps and their
edges to avoid damaging their coating
andseals.
183
QUICK HELP
8
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a bulb
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
3. Direction indicators
Type B, PY21W - 21W (amber)
- Remove the cover by pulling the
exiblerubbertab.
- Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn
anticlockwise.
- Remove the bulb by pressing it
lightlywhileturningitanticlockwise.
- Changethebulb.
- Ensurethatthecoverisretted
correctly all round to assure correct
sealing.
4. Front foglamps
Type C, H1 - 55W
- Remove the three clips and the
screw securing the wheel arch liner,
locatedbelowthebumper.
- Movethewheelarchlinerupwards.
- Disconnect the bulb holder
connector by pressing the tab at
thetop.
- Remove the bulb holder by
squeezing the two clips (at top and
bottom)usingangerandthumb.
- Replace the module (bulb holder
andbulb).
- Carry out the operations in reverse
ordertotthemoduleandretthe
wheelarchliner.
184
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a bulb
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Side repeater
Type A, WY5W - 5W (amber)
- Push the repeater towards the rear
and disengage it by pulling the
front.
- Contact a CITROËN dealer to
obtain a new repeater which is a
sealedcomponent.
- Toret,engagetherepeater
towards the rear and bring it
towardsthefront.
Courtesy lamps
Type A, 12V5W - 5W
- Unclip the lens by sliding a
screwdriver in the slots on each
sideofthecourtesylamp.
- Pullthebulboutandchangeit.
- Clip the lens in its housing and
ensurethatitissecuredcorrectly.
Front / Rear
185
QUICK HELP
8
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a bulb
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Rear lamps
This procedure requires the use of
the spanner supplied with the tools for
changingawheel.
Whenretting,takecareto
reposition the tabs and the wiring
correctly to avoid trapping the
wiring.
After changing the rear direction
indicator bulb, the reinitialisation time is
above2minutes.
- Move aside the 4 tabs then extract
thebulbholder.
- Remove the faulty bulb by
pressing it lightly while turning it
anticlockwise.
- Changethebulb.
Whenremovingthelampunit:
- with tailgate, pull the lamp unit
towards the centre of the vehicle,
- with hinged doors, pull the lamp
unittowardsyou.
For more information on bulbs, refer to
the"Typesofbulb".
1. Brake lamps / sidelamps
Type B,P21/5W-21/5W
2. Direction indicators
Type B, PY21W - 21W (amber)
3. Reversing lamps
Type B, P21W - 21W
4. Foglamps
Type B, P21W - 21W
High pressure jet washing
When using this type of washing
on stubborn dirt, do not persist on
the headlamps, the other lamps
and their edges to avoid damaging
theircoatingandseals.
Chapter 9, "Changing a wheel"
section.
- Identify the failed bulb, then open
thereardoorsto180°.
Chapter3,"Access"section.
- Removethetwoxingboltsusing
thespannerprovided.
- Pullthelampunitfromtheoutside.
- Holding the lamp, disconnect the
electricalconnector.
186
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a bulb
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Number plate lamps
- Unscrewthetwonuts.
- Pushthepins.
- If necessary, disconnect the
connectortoremovethelamp.
- Changethebulb.
Third brake lamp
Type A, W16W - 16W
Type A, W5W - 5W
With tailgate
- Disengage the plastic lens using a
screwdriver.
- Changethebulb.
- Replace the plastic lens and press
onit.
With hinged doors
- Uncliptheinteriortrim.
- Disconnect the connector by
movingasideitstab.
- Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn
anticlockwise.
- Changethebulb.
- Putthebulbholderbackinplace
andreconnecttheconnector.
- Putthetrimbackinplace.
187
QUICK HELP
8
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a fuse
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
CHANGING A FUSE
Thefuseboxesarelocated:
- in the lower dashboard on the left-
hand side (behind the cover),
- underthebonnet(nearthebattery).
The information given concerns only
those fuses which can be changed by
the user using the tweezer, located
behind the dashboard storage
compartmentontheright-handside.
Foranyotherwork,visitaCITROËN
dealeroraqualiedworkshop.
Removing and fitting a fuse
Always replace a failed fuse with a
fuse of the same rating.
Motortradetechnicians:for
complete information on the fuses
and relays, refer to the "Repair
Manual" diagrams via the dealer
network.
CITROËN will not accept responsibility
for the cost incurred in repairing
your vehicle or for rectifying the
malfunctions resulting from the
installation of accessories not
supplied and not recommended by the
CITROËNnetworkandnotinstalled
in accordance with its instructions,
in particular when the combined
consumption of all of the additional
equipment connected exceeds
10milliamperes.
Before replacing a fuse, the cause of
theincidentmustbeidentiedand
rectied.
● Usethetweezer.
188
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a fuse
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Dashboard fuses
Tilt the cover to gain access to the
fuses.
Fuses
F
Amperes
A
Allocation
1 15 Rear wiper
2 - Not used
3 5 Airbag
4 10
Airconditioning,diagnosticsocket,mirrorcontrol,
headlamp beam
5 30 Electric windows
6 30 Locks
7 5
Rear courtesy lamp, front map reading lamp, roof
console
8 20
Audioequipment,screen,tyreunder-ination
detection, alarm and siren
9 30 Frontandrear12Vsocket
10 15 Central column
11 15 Low current ignition switch
12 15 Rain and sunshine sensor, airbag
13 5 Instrument panel
14 15
Parkingsensors,digitalairconditioningcontrols,
hands-freephonekit
15 30 Locks
16 - Not used
17 40 Rearscreen/mirrorsdemist/defrost
189
QUICK HELP
8
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a fuse
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Passenger compartment fuses
Fuses
F
Amperes
A
Allocation
1 - Not used
2 20 Heated seats
3 - Not used
4 15 Folding mirrors relay
5 15 Refrigerationequipmentsocketrelay
190
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a fuse
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Fuses under the bonnet
After opening the bonnet, unclip and tilt
the corresponding box to gain access
tothefuses.
Fuses
F
Amperes
A
Allocation
1 20 Engine management
2 15 Horn
3 10 Front and rear wash-wipe pump
4 - Not used
5 15 Engine components
6 10 Steering wheel angle sensor, DSC
7 10 Brakeswitch,clutchswitch
8 25 Starter motor
9 10 Headlampbeammotor,eetmanagementunit
10 30 Engine components
11 40 Not used
12 30 Wipers
13 40 Built-in systems interface
14 30 Pump
15 10 Right-hand main beam headlamp
16 10 Left-hand main beam headlamp
17 15 Right-hand dipped beam headlamp
18 15 Left-hand dipped beam headlamp
191
QUICK HELP
8
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Changing a wiper blade
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Placing the windscreen wiper
blades in the special position
Changing a front wiper blade
- Liftthewiperarm.
- Unclipthebladeandremoveit.
- Fitthenewblade.
- Pushbackthewiperarm.
Changing the rear wiper blade
- Lift the wiper arm, then unclip the
bladeandremoveit.
- Fitthenewbladeandpushback
thewiperarm.
CHANGING A WIPER BLADE
- Within a minute after switching off
theignition,pressthewiperstalk
downwards to position the wiper
blades along the windscreen pillars
(specialposition).
To return the windscreen wipers to
their normal position, switch on the
ignitionandoperatethewiperstalk.
192
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Having your vehicle towed
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap08_Aide-rapide_ed02-2016
Without lifting (4 wheels on the
road)
Youshouldalwaysuseatowingarm.
BEING TOWED
This procedure involves the use of
the towing eye supplied with the tools
forchangingawheel.
From the front
- Unclip the cover by pressing the
bottompart.
- Fully screw in the removable
towingeye.
From the rear
- Unclip the cover using a coin or the
atpartofthetowingeye,
- Fully screw in the removable
towingeye.
When towing with the engine
switchedoff,thereisnobrakingor
steeringassistance.
Lifting (only 2 wheels on the
road)
It is preferable to raise the vehicle
usingprofessionalliftingequipment.
Vehicles tted with a manual
gearbox (Diesel version)
Inthecaseofvehiclesttedwith
a manual gearbox, the gear lever
must be in neutral, failure to observe
this special condition may result in
damagetotransmissionandbraking
components and the absence of
brakingassistancewhentheengineis
startedagain.
Section8,"Changingawheel".
193
TECHNICAL DATA
9
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
Dimensions
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
194
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
Dimensions
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
DIMENSIONS (MM)
L Overall length 4380
H Overall height 1801-1862
A Wheelbase 2728
B Front overhang 925
C Rear overhang 727
D Widthoverpanels:
without mirrors 1810
with mirrors 2112
E Widthoffronttracks 1505-1507
F Widthofreartracks 1554-1556
-
Length of the loading surface to the
seat
Row 2 990
Row 2, seat fully folded 1343
With front passenger seat folded 3000
195
TECHNICAL DATA
9
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
Dimensions
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
M Maxsillheightwith205/65R15tyresandtailgatetrim 582
Hinged doors Tailgate
Small Large
N Aperture height (under panel) 1118
O Aperture width 495 543 1582
Rear doors (mm)
196
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
Dimensions
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
P Aperture height 1009
Q Aperture width 640
- Height under raised tailgate 1892
Sliding side doors (mm)
197
TECHNICAL DATA
9
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
Weights
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
ENGINE CHARACTERISTICS
The engine characteristics (capacity,
maximum power, maximum power
speed, fuel, CO
2
emissions...)foryour
vehicle are given in the registration
certicate.
These characteristics correspond
to the values type-approved
on a test bed, under conditions
denedinEuropeanlegislation
(Directive1999/99/EC).
For more information, refer to the
manufacturer's website or sales
brochureforthemodel.Contact
aCITROËNdealeroraqualied
workshop.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS
Thesevalues,expressedinkg,canbe
found on the manufacturer's VIN plate
orlabel.
The maximum weights and towed
loads for your vehicle can be found on
thevehicle'sregistrationcerticate.
Thekerbweightisequaltotheweight
withoutload+driver(75kg)+fueltank
lledto90%.
The GTW and towed load values
indicated are valid up to a maximum
altitudeof1000metres.Thevalueof
the towed load mentioned must be
reduced by 10 % for each additional
1000metres.
Withloadtransfer,thebrakedtrailer
weight can be increased, on condition
that the equivalent of this load is
removed from the vehicle so that the
GTWisnotexceeded.
High ambient temperatures
may result in a reduction in the
performance of the vehicle in
ordertoprotecttheengine.Whenthe
ambient temperature is higher than
37°C,limitthetowedweight.
Towing with a lightly loaded
vehicle can adversely affect road
holding.
Towingatrailerincreasesbraking
distances.
When towing, the maximum permitted
speed is reduced (comply with the
legislationinforceinthecountry).
The recommended nose weight is
the downward force on the towball
(removablewithorwithouttools).
GVW: gross vehicle weight, the
maximumauthorisedweight.
GTW: gross train weight, the maximum
weightforvehicleplustrailer.
The location of the manufacturer's
plate is given in chapter 9,
"Identicationmarkings"section.
In each country, it is imperative that
the maximum towed loads authorised
by local legislation are complied
with.Tondoutyourvehicle'stowing
capacities and its gross train weight,
consultaCITROËNdealer.
198
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
Weights
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
Petrol Engines / Weights
5-seat
Engine Gearbox
Engine oil
capacity with lter
replacement (litres)
Unbraked trailer (kg)
Recommended nose
weight (kg)
1.6 110 hp 5-speed manual 3.25 750 55
1.6 VTi 100 hp 5-speed manual 4.25 600 70
1.6 VTi 120 hp 5-speed manual 4.25 690 70
1.6 VTi 120 hp
Euro 6
5-speed manual 4.25 600 70
1.2 PureTech S&S
110 hp Euro 6
5-speed manual 3.45 600 70
7-seat
Engine Gearbox
Engine oil
capacity with lter
replacement (litres)
Unbraked trailer (kg)
Recommended nose
weight (kg)
1.6 110 hp 5-speed manual 3.25 750 70
199
TECHNICAL DATA
9
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
Weights
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
Diesel Engines / Weights
5-seat
Engine Gearbox
Engine oil
capacity with lter
replacement (litres)
Unbraked trailer (kg)
Recommended nose
weight (kg)
1.6 HDi 75 hp 5-speed manual - 600 70
1.6 HDi 75 hp FAP 5-speed manual - 715 70
BlueHDi 75 hp
Euro 6
5-speed manual - 720 70
1.6 HDi 90 hp 5-speed manual 3.75 735 70
1.6 HDi 92 hp FAP 5-speed manual 3.75 715 70
1.6 e-HDi 92 hp FAP 5-speed manual 3.75 690 70
1.6 BlueHDi 100 hp
Euro 6
5-speed manual 3.75 600 70
1.6 BlueHDi 100 hp
S&S
5-speed manual
3.75
600 70
6-speed electronic 600 70
1.6 HDi 115 hp FAP 5-speed manual 3.75 735 70
1.6 BlueHDi 120 hp
Euro 6
6-speed manual 3.75 600 70
FAP :particlelter.
e-HDi :modelequippedwithStop&Start.
200
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
Weights
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
7-seat
Engine Gearbox
Engine oil
capacity with lter
replacement (litres)
Unbraked trailer (kg)
Recommended nose
weight (kg)
1.6 HDi 92 hp FAP 5-speed manual 3.75 750 70
1.6 BlueHDi 100 hp
Euro 6
5-speed manual 3.75 600 70
1.6 BlueHDi 100 hp
Euro 6 S&S
5-speed manual 3.75 600 70
1.6 HDi 115 hp FAP 5-speed manual 3.75 750 70
1.6 BlueHDi 120 hp
Euro 6
6-speed manual 3.75 600 70
FAP :particlelter.
e-HDi :modelequippedwithStop&Start.
201
TECHNICAL DATA
9
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
Identification markings
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS
A. Manufacturer's plate.
C. Tyres and paint colour code.
The label C,onthefrontdoorgives:
- the wheel and tyre sizes,
- the tyre pressures, laden and
unladen,
- the tyre pressure of the spare
wheel,
- thepaintcolourcode.
Thetyrepressuresshouldbechecked
whencold,atleastonceamonth.
B. Serial number.
This is engraved on the front right
wheelarch.
Ifyourvehicleisttedwiththe
system,refertothe"Under-ination
detection"sectioninChapter3.
202
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016Berlingo2VP_en_Chap09_Caract-technique_ed02-2016
Audio and Telematics
203
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
7-inchtouchscreentablet
GPS satellite navigation - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth
®
telephone
Contents
First steps 204
Steering mounted controls 206
Menus 207
Navigation 208
Navigation - Guidance 216
Trafc 220
Radio Media 222
Radio 228
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 230
Media 232
Settings 234
Connected services 242
MirrorLink
TM
242
CarPlay
®
246
Telephone 248
Frequentlyaskedquestions 256
The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in
yourvehicle.
As a safety measure, the driver should only carry out operations
whichrequireprolongedattentionwhilethevehicleisstationary.
The display of an energy economy mode message signals that
electricalsystemsoperatingaregoingintostandby.
Refertotheenergyeconomymodesection.
Audio and Telematics
204
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
First steps
Use the buttons above the touch screen tablet
for access to the menu carousel, then press the
virtualbuttonsinthetouchscreentablet.
Each menu is displayed in one or two pages
(primarypageandsecondarypage).
Secondary pagePrimary page
In very hot conditions, the system may
go into stand-by (screen and sound
completely off) for a minimum period of
5minutes.
Audio and Telematics
205
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Volumeadjustment(eachsourceisindependent,
including traffic announcements (TA) and
navigationinstructions).
Mute the sound by pressing simultaneously on
thevolumeincreaseandreducebuttons.
Unmute the sound by pressing one of the
twovolumebuttons.
Press Menu to display the menu
carousel.
Increasevolume.
Reducevolume.
Selecting the audio source (depending on
version):
- "FM"/"DAB"*/"AM"*stations.
- "USB"memorystick.
- SmartphoneviaMirrorLink
TM
or CarPlay
®
.
- Telephone connected by Bluetooth
®
* and
Bluetooth
®
audiostreaming*.
- Media player connected to the auxiliary
socket(jack,cablenotsupplied).
*Dependingonequipment.
Short-cuts:usingthetouchbuttonsintheupper
band of the touch screen tablet, it is possible to
go directly to the selection of the audio source
or the list of stations (or titles, depending on the
source).
The screen is of the "resistive" type, it
is necessary to press firmly, particularly
for"flick"gestures(scrollingthrougha
list,movingthemap...).Asimplewipe
willnotbeenough.Pressingwithmore
thanonefingerisnotrecognised.
The screen can be used when wearing
gloves.Thistechnologyallowsuseat
alltemperatures.
In very high temperatures, the volume
maybelimitedtoprotectthesystem.
Thereturntonormaltakesplacewhen
the temperature in the passenger
compartmentdrops.
To clean the screen, use a soft
non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth)
withoutanyadditionalproduct.
Donotusepointedobjectsonthe
screen.
Do not touch the screen with wet
hands.
Audio and Telematics
206
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Steering mounted controls
Radio:selecttheprevious/next
presetstation.
Media:selectagenre/artist/folder
fromthelist.
Selecttheprevious/nextentryin
amenu.
Decreasevolume.
Radio:automaticsearchforahigher
frequency.
Media:Selectnexttrack.
Media,pressandhold:fastforward.
Jumpinthelist.
Mute:cutthesoundbypressing
the volume increase and decrease
buttonssimultaneously.
Restore the sound by pressing one of
thetwovolumebuttons.
Radio:automaticsearchforalower
frequency.
Media:selectprevioustrack.
Media,pressandhold:fastback.
Jumpinthelist.
Changetheaudiosource.
Confirmaselection.
Call/endcallonthetelephone.
Pressformorethan2seconds:
accesstothetelephonemenu.
Increasevolume.
Audio and Telematics
207
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Menus
Settings
Radio Media
Navigation
DrivingConnected services Telephone
Adjustthesettingsforsound(balance,
ambience,...),colourschemesandthedisplay
(language,units,date,time,...).
Select an audio source, a radio station, display
photographs.
Enter navigation settings and choose a
destination.
Accesstothetripcomputer.
Activate, deactivate or enter settings for certain
vehiclefunctions.
Operate certain applications on your
smartphoneviaMirrorLink
TM
or CarPlay
®
.
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth
®
.
Access to the CarPlay
®
function after
connectionofyoursmartphonebyUSBcable.
(Depending on equipment)
(Depending on equipment)
Audio and Telematics
208
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Navigation
Navigation Route settings
Audio and Telematics
209
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Settings
Navigation
Enter destination Displayrecentdestinations.
Route settings
Fastest
Choosethenavigationcriteria.
The map displays the route chosen according to
thesecriteria.
Shortest
Time/distance
Ecological
Tolls
Ferries
Traffic
Strict-Close
Show route on map Displaythemapandstartnavigation.
Confirm Savetheoptions.
Save current location Savethecurrentaddress.
Stop navigation Deletethenavigationinformation.
Voice synthesis
Choose the volume for voice and announcement
ofstreetnames.
Diversion
Detour from your initial route by a determined
distance.
Navigation
Display in text mode
Zoomin.
Zoomout.
Displayinfullscreenmode.
Usethearrowstomovethemap.
Switchto2Dmap.
Audio and Telematics
210
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
To use the telephone functions,
refer to the "Telephone"section.
For managing contacts and
their addresses, refer to the
"Telephone"section.
Navigation
Address
Enter destination
Contacts
Audio and Telematics
211
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Secondary page
Enter destination
Address
Currentloc.
Address settingsPoint of interest
Town center
Save Savethecurrentaddress.
Add waypoint Addawaypointtotheroute.
Navigate to Presstocalculatetheroute.
Contacts
Addresses
Selectacontactthencalculatetheroute.
View
Navigate to
Search for contact
Call
On the map
Display the map and zoom to view the
roads.
Itinerary
Create, add or delete a waypoint or view the
itinerary.
Stop Deletenavigationinformation.
Navigate to Presstocalculatetheroute.
Audio and Telematics
212
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Search for a point of interest
Navigation
Point of interest displayed on the map
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Audio and Telematics
213
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Secondary page
Search for POI
All POIs
Listofcategoriesavailable.
After choosing the category, select the points of
interest.
Motor
Dining/hotels
Personal
Search Savethesettings.
Navigation
Secondary page
Show POIs
Select all
ChoosethedisplaysettingsforPOIs.Delete
Import POIs
Confirm Savetheoptions.
Audio and Telematics
214
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Moving
between
the two
menus.
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Traffic messages
Settings
Diversion
Map settings
Navigation
Map settings
Settings
Settings
Audio and Telematics
215
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Secondary page
Traffic messages
On the route
Settings for the choice of messages and the
filterradius.
Around vehicle
Near destination
Detour
Detour over a distance
Recalculate route
Finish Saveyourselections.
Navigation
Secondary page
Map settings
Orientation
Flat view north heading
Choose the display and orientation of the
map.
Flat view vehicle heading
Perspective view
Maps
Aspect
"Day" map colour
"Night" map colour
Automaticday/night
Confirm Savethesettings.
Navigation
Secondary page
Settings
Route settings
Enter settings and choose the volume for the
voiceandannouncementofstreetnames.
Voice
Alarm!
Traffic options
Confirm Saveyourselections.
Audio and Telematics
216
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Navigation - Guidance
Choosing a new destination
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Save" to save the address
enteredasacontactentry.
Thesystemallowsupto200entries.
Select "Confirm".
Press on "Show route on map" to
startnavigation.
Select "Address".
Select the "Country:" from the
list offered, then in the same
way the "City:" or its post
code, the "Road:", the "N°:".
Confirmeachtime.
Select "Navigate to".
Choosetherestrictioncriteria:
"Tolls", "Ferries", "Traffic", "Strict",
"Close".
Choosethenavigationcriteria:
"Fastest" or "Shortest" or "Time/
distance" or "Ecological".
To delete navigation information,
press on "Settings".
Press on "Stop navigation".
To resume navigation press on
"Settings".
Press on "Resume guidance".
Press on Navigation to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Towards a new destination
Or
Audio and Telematics
217
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Towards a recent destination
Select "Enter destination".
Select an address from
thelistoffered.
Press on Navigation to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Select "Navigate to".
Towards a contact
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Contacts".
Press on Navigation to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Select a destination from
the contacts in the list
offered.
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" to
startnavigation.
To be able to use navigation "towards
a contact in the directory", it is first
necessary to enter the address for your
contact.
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or
press "Show route on map" to start
navigation.
Audio and Telematics
218
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Towards GPS coordinates
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Address".
Enter the "Longitude:"
then the "Latitude:".
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or
press "Show route on map" to start
navigation.
Press on Navigation to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Towards a point on the map
Select "Enter destination".
Select "On the map".
Press on Navigation to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Zoominginonthemapshowspointswith
information.
Alongpressonapointopensitscontent.
Towards points of interest (POI)
Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different
categories.
Press on Navigation to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Select "Search for POI".
Select "All POIs",
Or
"Motor",
Or
"Dining/hotels".
Audio and Telematics
219
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
An annual mapping update allows
new points of interest to be presented
toyou.
YoucanalsoupdatetheRiskareas/
Dangerareaseverymonth.
Thedetailedprocedureisavailableon:
http://citroen.navigation.com.
Audio and Telematics
220
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Risk areas / Danger zone
alert settings
Press on Navigation to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Select "Settings".
Select "Alarm!"(Alert).
ItisthenpossibletoactivateRiskareasalerts
then:
- "Audible warning"
- "Alert only when navigating"
- "Alert only for overspeed"
- "Display speed limits"
- Timing:thechoiceoftimingallowsthe
timebeforegivingaRiskareasalerttobe
defined.
Select "Confirm".
This series of alerts and displays is
onlyavailableifRiskareashavefirst
been downloaded and installed on the
system.
Trafc
Traffic information
Display of messages
Press on Navigation to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Select "Traffic messages".
Choosefiltersettingsfor:
"On the route",
"Around",
"Near destination", filters to fine-
tunethelistofmessages.
Pressagaintoremovethefilter.
Audio and Telematics
221
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Select the message from
thelistoffered.
Select the magnifying glass to have
voiceinformation.
Setting lters
Press on Navigation to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Select "Settings".
Select "Traffic options".
Select:
- "Be advised of new messages",
- "Speak messages".
Thenenterthefilterradius.
Select "Confirm".
Werecommendafilterradiusof:
- 12miles(20km)inurbanareas,
- 30miles(50km)onmotorways.
TMC (Traffic Message Channel)
messages on GPS-Navigation contain
traffic information transmitted in real
time.
The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
messages.Tooperate,thisfunction
needs good reception of a radio station
transmittingthistypeofmessage.
When a traffic report is transmitted,
the current audio source is interrupted
automaticallytoplaytheTAmessage.
Normalplaybackoftheaudiosource
resumes at the end of the transmission
ofthemessage.
Receiving TA messages
Press on Navigation to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Select "Settings".
Select "Voice".
Activate/Deactivate"Traffic
(TA)".
Audio and Telematics
222
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Radio Media
Level 1 Level 2
List of FM stations
Save
Audio and Telematics
223
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Radio Media
List
List of FM stations Pressonaradiostationtoselectit.
Radio Media
Source
FM Radio
Selectchangeofsource.
DAB Radio
AM Radio
USB
MirrorLink
CarPlay
iPod
Bluetooth
AUX
Radio Media
Save (preset)
PressanemptylocationtoSaveit.
Audio and Telematics
224
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Media
Photos
List of FM stations
Audio and Telematics
225
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Radio Media
Secondary page
Radio list
Save Pressaradiostationtoselectit.
Update list Updatethelistofstationsreceived.
Frequency Enterthedesiredradiofrequency.
Confirm Savethesettings.
Radio Media
Secondary page
Photos
Home screen Displaytheselectedphotointhehomepage.
Rotate Rotatethephoto9.
Select all
Selectallthephotosinthelist.
Pressagaintodeselect.
Slideshow
Previousphoto.
Displaythephotosinsequence,full-screen.
Thesystemsupportsthefollowingimageformats:
.gif,.jpg,.bmp,.png.
Pause/Play.
Nextphoto.
Full screen Displaytheselectedphotofull-screen.
Audio and Telematics
226
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Media
Settings
Settings
Settings
Audio and Telematics
227
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Radio Media
Secondary page
Media list
Presentationofthelastmediaused.
Radio Media
Secondary page
Settings
Media
Settings
Shuffle
(alltracks)
Choosetheplaysettings.
Shuffle
(current album)
Repeat
Aux.amplification
Radio
Settings
RDS options
Activateordeactivatethesettings.
DAB/FMstationtracking
Display Radio Text
Digital radio slideshow
display
Announcements
Settings
Traffic announcements (TA)
Activateordeactivatethesettings.
News - Weather
Sport - Programm info
Flash - Unforeseen
events
Confirm Savethesettings.
Audio and Telematics
228
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Press on Radio Media to display the
primarypage.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primarypage.
Select "Save".
If necessary, select change of
source.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primarypage.
Selectchangesource.
"AM Radio".
By automatic frequency search
Select "FM Radio".
"AM Radio".
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Or
Select a preset radio station
inthelist.
Select "FM Radio".
Select a radio station from
thelistoffered.
Select "Update list" to refresh the
list.
Select "List"intheprimarypage.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primarypage.
Radio
Changing a radio frequencySelecting a station
THEN
Radio reception may be affected by
the use of electrical equipment not
approved by CITROËN, such as a USB
chargerconnectedtothe12Vsocket.
The exterior environment (hills,
buildings,tunnel,carpark,below
ground...)maypreventreception,
eveninRDSstationtrackingmode.
This phenomenon is normal in the
propagation of radio waves and is in no
way indicative of a fault with the audio
system.
Select "Radio list" in the secondary
page.
Or
Press 3 or 4 to move the cursor for an
automatic search down or up for a radio
frequency.
Or
Toselectapresetradiostation.
Audio and Telematics
229
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Select a radio station or frequency (refer to the
correspondingsection).
Press on Radio Media to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Select "Settings".
Select "Radio".
Activate/deactivate"RDS
options".
Press on Radio Media to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Press on "Save"(preset).
Select a number in the list to preset the
previouslychosenradiostation.
A long press on a number saves (presets) the
station.
Press on Frequency.
Enter the frequency in full
(e.g.:92.10MHz)usingthekeypad
then "Confirm".
Changing radio station
Pressing the name of the current radio station
bringsupalist.
To change radio station press the name of the
desiredstation.
Or
Press on Radio Media to display the
primarypage.
Select "Save"(preset).
Presetting a station Activating / Deactivating RDS
OR
THEN
A press on this button presets all of
thestationsoneaftertheother.
Recalling preset stations
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
retuningtoalternativefrequencies.
However, in certain conditions, coverage
of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the entire country as radio
stations do not cover 100 % of the
territory.Thisexplainsthelossof
receptionofthestationduringajourney.
Audio and Telematics
230
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Displayofoptions:
if active but not available, the display will be greyed out,
ifactiveandavailable,thedisplaywillbeblank.
Display of "Radiotext" for
thecurrentstation.
Selecttheaudiosource.
Displaythe"DAB"band.
Display of the name of the
currentstation.
Short-cut:accesstothechoiceofaudio
source and the list of stations (or titles,
dependingonthesource). Selecttheradiostation.
Any thumbnail broadcast by
thestation.
Preset stations, buttons 1
to15.
Shortpress:selectthe
presetradiostation.
Longpress:presetaradio
station.
Next"Multiplex".
Nextradiostation.
Secondarypage.
Display the name and
number of the "multiplex"
servicebeingused.
Previous"Multiplex".
Previousradiostation.
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio
If the "DAB" radio station being listened to is not
availableon"FM",the"DABFM"optionisgreyedout.
Journaline
®
isatext-basedinformationservicedesignedfordigitalradiosystems.
Itprovidestext-basedinformationstructuredaroundtopicsandsub-topics.
Thisserviceisavailablefromthe"LISTOFDABSTATIONS"page.
Audio and Telematics
231
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Selectchangeofsource.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primarypage.
Select "DAB Radio".
Select "List"intheprimarypage.
Selecttheradiostationfromthelistoffered.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Select "Settings".
Select "Radio".
Select "Digital/FM auto
tracking" then "Confirm".
DAB / FM auto trackingDigital radio
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the
territory.
When the digital radio signal is poor,
"DAB/FMstationtracking"allowsyouto
continue listening to the same station,
by automatically switching to the
corresponding "FM" analogue station
(ifthereisone).
If"DAB/FMstationtracking"is
activated, there is a difference of a
few seconds when the system switches
to "FM" analogue radio with sometimes
avariationinvolume.
When the digital signal is restored,
thesystemautomaticallychangesback
to"DAB".
Digital radio provides higher quality
reception and also the graphical display
of current information on the radio
stationbeinglistenedto.Select"List"in
theprimarypage.
The range of multiplexes available is
displayedinalphabeticalorder.
If the "DAB" station being listened to
is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM"
optiongreyedout),or"DAB/FMstation
tracking"isnotactivated,thesound
will cut out while the digital signal is too
weak.
or
Select "Radio list" in the secondary
page.
Audio and Telematics
232
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
The audio system will only play audio files
with".wma,.aac,.flac,.oggand.mp3"file
extensions and with a bit rate of between
32Kbpsand320Kbps.
ItalsosupportsVBR(VariableBitRate)mode.
Noothertypeoffile(.mp4,...)canbeplayed.
".wma"filesmustbeofthestandardwma9type.
The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and
48KHz.
Information and advice
Media
USB port
Selection of source
The steering mounted SRC (source)
button can be used to go to the next
media source, available if the source
isactive.
Selectchangeofsource.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primarypage.
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory),anoperationwhichcantakefrom
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
numberoffolderstoreducethewaitingtime.
The playlists are updated every time the
ignition is switched off or on connection of a
USBmemorystick.Thelistsarememorised:if
they are not modified, the subsequent loading
timewillbeshorter.
InserttheUSBmemorystickintotheUSBport
or connect the USB device to the USB port
usingasuitablecable(notsupplied).
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
Connect the portable device (MP3 player) to
theauxiliaryJacksocketusinganaudiocable
(notsupplied).
This source is only available if the "Auxiliary
socket"optionhasbeenactivatedinthe
"Media"settings.
Firstadjustthevolumeofyourportabledevice
(toahighlevel).Thenadjustthevolumeofyour
audiosystem.
Display and management of the controls are
viatheportabledevice.
Choosethesource.
To protect the system, do not use a
USBhub.
Audio and Telematics
233
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters, without using special characters
(e.g.""?;ù)toavoidanyplayingand
displayingproblems.
UseonlyUSBmemorysticksformattedFAT32
(fileallocationtable).
The system supports USB mass
storageportableplayers,BlackBerry
®
devices or Apple
®
players via USB
ports.Theadaptorcableisnot
supplied.
Control of the peripheral device is with
theaudiosystemcontrols.
Other peripheral devices, not
recognised by the system on
connection, must be connected to the
auxiliarysocketusingaJackcable(not
supplied).
It is recommended that the USB cable
fortheportabledeviceisused.
To protect the system, do not use a
USBhub.
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming
Streaming allows audio files on your telephone
tobeplayedthroughthevehicle'sspeakers.
Connectthetelephone:seethe"Telephone"
section, then "Bluetooth".
Choose the "Audio" or "All"profile.
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessarytostarttheaudioplaybackfromthe
telephone.
Control is from the peripheral device or by
usingtheaudiosystembuttons.
Once connected in streaming mode,
the telephone is considered to be a
mediasource.
It is recommended that you activate
"Repeat" on the Bluetooth
®
peripheral.
Connecting Apple
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port
usingasuitablecable(notsupplied).
Playstartsautomatically.
Controlisviatheaudiosystem.
The classifications available are those
of the portable device connected
(artists/albums/genres/playlists/
audiobooks/podcasts).
The default classification used is by
artist.Tomodifytheclassificationused,
return to the first level of the menu
then select the desired classification
(playlists for example) and confirm
to go down through the menu to the
desiredtrack.
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
your Apple
®
player.
Audio and Telematics
234
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1
Settings
Level 2
Audio settings
Choice of color scheme
Audio settings
Audio settings
Audio and Telematics
235
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Settings
Audio settings
Ambience Choosethesoundambience.
Balance SounddistributionusingtheArkamys
®
system.
Sound effects
Setthevolumeoractivatethelinktovehicle
speed.
Ringtones Setthetelephoneringtoneandvolume.
Voice
Setthevolumeandvoiceforspeakingstreet
names
Confirm Saveyoursettings.
Settings
Turn off screen
Functionthatturnsoffthedisplay.
Pressingthescreenreactivatesit.
Settings
Color schemes
Confirm
Choose the color scheme, then confirm to save
thesetting.
Audio and Telematics
236
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Units
Display screen
Configuration
Adjust date and time
Factory settings
Level 1 Level 2
Audio and Telematics
237
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Settings
Secondary page
System Settings
Units
Set the units used to display distance, fuel
consumptionandtemperature.
Delete data
Select the desired data in the list then press
Delete.
Factory settings Returntofactorysettings.
Confirm Savethesettings.
Settings
Secondary page
Time/Date
Confirm Setthedateandtimethenconfirm.
Settings
Secondary page
Screen settings
Activate automatic text scrolling
Activateordeactivatethesettingthenconfirm.Activate animations
Confirm
Audio and Telematics
238
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Choice of language
CalculatorConfiguration
Calendar
Level 1 Level 2
Audio and Telematics
239
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Settings
Secondary page
Languages
Confirm Selectthelanguagethenconfirm.
Settings
Secondary page
Calculator
Selectthecalculator.
Settings
Secondary page
Calendar
Selectthecalendar.
Audio and Telematics
240
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Audio settings
Press on Settings to display the
primarypage.
Select "Audio settings".
Select "Ambience"
Or
"Balance"
Or
"Sound effects"
Or
"Ringtones"
Or
"Voice".
On-boardaudio:Arkamys
©
Sound
Staging optimises sound distribution in
thepassengercompartment.
At each change of color scheme the
systemrestarts,showingablack
screenforafewmoments.
The distribution (or spatialisation using
theArkamys
®
system) of sound is an
audio process that allows the audio
quality to be adapted to the number of
passengersinthevehicle.
Availableonlywiththe6-speaker
configuration.
As a safety measure, the procedure
for changing the color scheme is only
possiblewiththevehiclestationary.
The audio settings (Ambience, Bass:,
Treble: and Loudness) are different
and independent for each sound
source.
The settings for Distribution and
Balancearecommontoallsources.
- "Ambience" (choice of 6 musical
ambiences)
- "Bass:"
- "Treble:"
- "Loudness"(Activate/Deactivate)
- "Distribution" ("Driver", "All
passengers", "Front only")
- "Audible response from touch
screen"
- "Volume linked to speed"
(Activate/Deactivate)
Color schemes
Press on Settings to display the
primarypage.
Select "Color schemes".
Select the color scheme in the list
then "Confirm".
Audio and Telematics
241
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Press on Settings to display the
primarypage.
Press on Settings to display the
primarypage.
Press on Settings to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage. Press on the secondary pagePressonthesecondarypage.
Select "System Settings". Select "Time/Date" to change the
time zone, synchronisation with GPS,
thetimeanditsformat,thenthedate.
Select "Screen settings".
Select "Units" to change the units
of distance, fuel consumption and
temperature.
Select "Languages" to change
language.
Activate or deactivate "Activate
automatic text scrolling" and
"Activate animations".
Select "Delete data" to delete the
list of recent destinations, personal
pointsofinterest,contactsinthelist.
Select "Calculator" to display a
calculator.
Choose the item then select "Delete".
Select "Calendar" to display a
calendar.
Select "Factory settings" to return
totheoriginalsettings.
Modifying system settings
The system does not manage changes
between summer time and winter time
automatically(accordingtocountry).
Audio and Telematics
242
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
MirrorLink
TM
Optional depending on the
smartphoneandoperatingsystem.
Connected services
Audio and Telematics
243
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, using a smartphone when
drivingisprohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
The synchronisation of a
smartphone allows applications on a
smartphone that are adapted to the
MirrorLink
TM
technology to be displayed
inthevehicle'sscreen.
The principles and standards
areconstantlyevolving.Forthe
communication process between the
smartphoneandthesystemtowork
correctly, the smartphone must be
unlocked;updatetheoperatingsystem
of your smartphone as well as the date
and time in the smartphone and the
system.
For the list of eligible smartphones,
connect to the brand's internet website
inyourcountry.
As a safety measure, applications
can only be viewed with the vehicle
stationary; display is interrupted once
thevehicleismoving.
When connecting a smartphone to the
system, it is recommended that Bluetooth
®
bestartedonthesmartphone.
Start the application on the
smartphone (optional, depending
on the smartphone and operating
system).
Access to the different audio sources remains
accessibleinthemarginoftheMirrorLink
TM
display,usingtouchbuttonsintheupperbar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
atanytimeusingthededicatedbuttons.
During the procedure, several screen
pages relating to certain functions
aredisplayed.
Accept to start and end the
connection.
ConnectaUSBcable.The
smartphone charges when
connectedbyaUSBcable.
Press on "MirrorLink
TM
" to
start the application in the
system.
Once connection is established, an page
is displayed with the applications already
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted
toMirrorLink
TM
technology.
If only one application has been downloaded to
thesmartphone,itstartsautomatically.
MirrorLink
TM
smartphone
connection
Presstheendofthelightingcontrolstalkto
start voice recognition of your smartphone via
thesystem.
Voice recognition requires a compatible
smartphone connected to the vehicle by
Bluetooth
®
.
Voice recognition
Pleasenote:
- if your smartphone is supported, to
makeit"MirrorLink
TM
" compatible,
some phone manufacturers
nevertheless invite you to first
downloadadedicatedapplication.
From the system, press on
"Connected services" to display the
primarypage.
Audio and Telematics
244
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Audio and Telematics
245
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Connected
services
MirrorLink
TM
Access or return to the applications already
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to
MirrorLink
TM
technology.
Access to a menu list depending on the
applicationchosen.
"Back":abandonthecurrentoperation,goupone
level.
"Home":accessorreturntothe"Carmode"page.
Access to the "Connected services" primary
page.
Audio and Telematics
246
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
CarPlay
®
Audio and Telematics
247
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, using a smartphone when
drivingisprohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
As a safety measure, applications
can only be viewed with the vehicle
stationary; display is interrupted once
thevehicleismoving.
The synchronisation of a
smartphone allows applications on a
smartphone that are adapted to the
CarPlay
®
technology to be displayed on
thevehicle'sscreen.
As the principles and standards are
constantly evolving, it is recommended
that you update the operating system of
yoursmartphone.
For the list of eligible smartphones,
connect to the brand's internet website
inyourcountry.
On connecting the USB cable, the
"Telephone" function changes to
"CarPlay"inthemenucarousel.
Press on "CarPlay" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface.
Press on "CarPlay" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface.
ConnectaUSBcable.The
smartphone charges when
connectedbyaUSBcable.
Presstheendofthelightingcontrolstalkto
start voice recognition of your smartphone via
thesystem.
CarPlay
®
smartphone
connection
During the procedure, one or more
screen pages relating to certain
functionsaredisplayedonconnection.
From the system, press on
"Connected services" to display the
primarypage.
ConnecttheUSBcable.The
smartphone is charged while
connectedbytheUSBcable.
Or
Voice recognition
When the telephone menu is displayed,
connection of the USB cable causes the
display to automatically change to CarPlay
mode.
When another menu is displayed, on
connection of a USB cable a message is
displayed in the upper bar, indicating that
CarPlaymodehasbeenactivated.
PressOpentodisplayCarPlaymode.
Audio and Telematics
248
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1
Telephone
Level 2 Level 3
Contacts
Call log
Audio and Telematics
249
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Telephone
Call log
All calls
Aftermakingchoices,startthecall.
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
Contacts
Magnifying glass
View
Create
Call
Telephone
Contacts
Addresses
Aftermakingchoices,startthecall.
View
Create
Modify
Delete
Delete all
By name
Confirm
Navigate to
Search for contact
Call
Audio and Telematics
250
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Bluetooth (devices)
Telephone Options
Devices detected
Telephone connection
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Audio and Telematics
251
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Telephone
connection
Secondary page
Bluetooth
connection
Search
Start the search for another peripheral device to
connect.
Connect / Disconnect
Start or stop the Bluetooth
®
connection to the
selectedperipheraldevice.
Update
Import the contacts from the selected telephone
tostorethemintheaudiosystem.
Delete Deletetheselectedtelephone.
Confirm Savethesettings.
Telephone
connection
Secondary page
Search
for devices
Devices detected
Telephone
Startthesearchforperipheraldevices.Audio streaming
Internet
Telephone
connection
Secondary page
Telephone Options
Put on hold
Cut the microphone temporarily so that the
contact cannot hear your conversation with a
passenger.
Update
Import the contacts from the selected telephone
tosavethenintheaudiosystem.
Ringtones Choosethetelephoneringtoneandvolume.
Memory info.
Contact records used and free, percentage of
storage space used by internal contacts and
Bluetooth
®
contacts.
Confirm Savethesettings.
Audio and Telematics
252
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
telephone
For reasons of safety and because they
require prolonged attention on the part
of the driver, the operations for pairing
the Bluetooth
®
mobile telephone to the
hands-free system of the audio system
must be carried out with the vehicle
stationary.
Procedure (short) from the
telephone
In the Bluetooth
®
menu of your device, select
thesystemnameinthelistofdevicesdetected.
Enter a code of at least 4 figures in the device
andconfirm.
Enter this same code in the system,
select "OK"andconfirm.
Procedure from the system
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth
®
function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
configuration).
Press on Telephone to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Select "Bluetooth connection".
Select "Search for devices".
The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
If the telephone is not detected, it is
recommended that you switch the Bluetooth
®
functiononyourtelephoneoffandthenonagain.
Select the name of the
desired peripheral from the
list and "Confirm".
Enter a code of at least 4 figures for
the connection then "Confirm".
Enter this same code in the telephone then
accepttheconnection.
Thesystemofferstoconnectthetelephone:
- in "Telephone"(hands-freekit,telephone
only),
- in "Audio streaming"(streaming:wireless
playing of audio files from the telephone),
- in "Internet" (internet browsing, only if your
telephone is compatible with the "DUN"
Dial-UpNetworkingBluetooth
®
standard).
Selectoneormoreprofilesandconfirm.
Audio and Telematics
253
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
The services available depend
onthenetwork,theSIMcardand
the compatibility of the Bluetooth
®
telephoneused.Checkthetelephone
manualandwithyournetworkprovider
for details of the services available
toyou.
The ability of the system to connect
with only one profile depends on the
telephone.Thethreeprofilesmayall
connectbydefault.
Visitwww.citroen.co.ukformoreinformation
(compatibility,additionalhelp,...).
The recognised telephone
appearsinthelist.
Depending on your telephone, you may be
askedtoacceptautomaticconnectionevery
timetheignitionisswitchedon.
On return to the vehicle, if the last telephone
connected is present again, it is reconnected
automatically and within around 30 seconds
after switching on the ignition the pairing is
done without any action on your part, with
(Bluetooth
®
activated).
To modify the automatic connection mode,
select the telephone in the list then select the
desiredprofile.
Depending on the type of telephone,
thesystemwillaskyoutoacceptornot
thetransferofyourcontacts.
If not, select "Update".
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
peripheral device
Automatic reconnection
On switching on the ignition, the telephone
connected when the ignition was last switched
off is automatically reconnected, if this
connection mode had been activated during the
pairingprocedure.
The connection is confirmed by the display of a
messageandthenameofthetelephone.
Manual connection
Press on Telephone to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list
ofpairedperipherals.
Selecttheperipheraltoconnect.
Press on "Search for devices".
The connection is confirmed by the display of a
messageandthenameofthetelephone.
Audio and Telematics
254
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Managing paired
telephones
This function allows the connection or
disconnection of a peripheral device as
wellasthedeletionofapairing.
Using the telephone is not
recommendedwhiledriving.
Parkthevehicle.
Makethecallusingthesteering
mountedcontrols.
Press on Telephone to display the
primarypage.
Pressonthesecondarypage.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list
ofpairedperipheraldevices.
Selecttheperipheralinthelist.
Select "Search for devices"
Or
"Connect / Disconnect" to start or
end the Bluetooth connection with
theselecteddevice.
Or
"Delete"todeletethepairing.
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
superimposeddisplayinthescreen.
Makeashortpressonthesteering
mounted TEL button to accept an
incomingcall.
Makealongpress
on the steering mounted TEL button
torejectthecall.
Or
Select "End call".
Making a call
Calling a new number
Press on Telephone to display the
primarypage.
Enter the phone number using the
digitalkeypad.
Press "Call"tostartthecall.
Calling a contact
Press on Telephone to display the
primarypage.
Ormakealongpress
on the steering mounted TELbutton.
Audio and Telematics
255
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Select "Contacts".
Selectthedesiredcontactfromthelistoffered.
Select "Call".
Calling a recently used number
Press on Telephone to display the
primarypage.
Select "Call log".
Selectthedesiredcontactfromthelistoffered.
Itisalwayspossibletomakeacall
directlyfromthetelephone;parkthe
vehiclefirstasasafetymeasure.
Managing contacts / entries
Press on Telephone to display the
primarypage.
Select "Contacts".
Select "View".
Select "Create" to add a new contact,
observingthe"internationalformat".
Or
"Modify"toedittheselectedcontact.
Or
"Delete" to delete the selected
contact.
Or
"Delete all" to delete all information
fortheselectedcontact.
Select "By name" to view the list of
contacts.
Audio and Telematics
256
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Thetablebelowgivesanswerstothemostfrequentlyaskedquestionsonyouraudiosystem.
Frequentlyaskedquestions
Navigation
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The route calculation is not
successful.
The navigation settings may conflict with the current location
(exclusionoftollroadsonatollmotorway).
Checkthesettingsinthe"Navigation"menu.
ThePOIsdonotappear. ThePOIshavenotbeenselected. SelectthePOIsinthelistofPOIs.
TheRiskareasaudible
warningdoesnotwork.
Theaudiblewarningisnotactive. Activate audible warnings in the "Navigation"
menu.
The system does not
suggest a detour around an
incidentontheroute.
TheguidancecriteriadonottakeaccountofTMCmessages. Select the "Information" function in the list of
guidancecriteria.
IreceiveaRiskareasalert
whichisnotonmyroute.
Otherthanguidance,thesystemannouncesallRiskareas
positionedinaconelocatedinfrontofthevehicle.Itmayprovidean
alertforRiskareaslocatedonnearbyorparallelroads.
Zoominonthemaptoviewtheexactpositionof
theRiskareas.Select"Ontheroute"tonolonger
receive alerts other than guidance or to reduce
thetimefortheannouncement.
Audio and Telematics
257
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Certaintrafficjamsalong
the route are not indicated
inrealtime.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive
thetrafficinformation.
Wait until the traffic information is being received
correctly (display of the traffic information icons
onthemap).
Thefiltersaretoorestrictive. Modifythesettings.
Incertaincountries,onlymajorroutes(motorways...)arelistedfor
thetrafficinformation.
Thisphenomenonisnormal.Thesystemis
dependentonthetrafficinformationavailable.
The altitude is not
displayed.
Onstarting,theinitialisationoftheGPSmaytakeupto3minutesto
receivemorethan4satellitescorrectly.
Wait until the system has completed starting
up, so that there is GPS coverage of at least
4satellites.
Dependingonthegeographicalenvironment(tunnel...)orthe
weather,theconditionsofreceptionoftheGPSsignalmayvary.
Thisphenomenonisnormal.Thesystem
is dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.
Audio and Telematics
258
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Radio
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The quality of reception of
the radio station listened
to gradually deteriorates
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5Mhzisdisplayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station
listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area
throughwhichthevehicleistravelling.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cutmenutoenablethesystemtocheck
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
thegeographicalarea.
Theenvironment(hills,buildings,tunnels,basementcarparks...)
blockreception,includinginRDSmode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
afaultwiththeaudiosystem.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
throughacarwashorintoanundergroundcarpark).
HavetheaerialcheckedbyaCITROËNdealer.
I cannot find some radio
stations in the list of
stationsreceived.
Thestationisnotreceivedoritsnamehaschangedinthelist. Press on the "Update list" function in the system
toupdatethelistofstationsreceived.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name
(thetitleofthesongforexample).
Thesysteminterpretsthisinformationasthenameofthestation.
The name of the radio
stationchanges.
Audio and Telematics
259
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Media
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
PlaybackofmyUSB
memorystickstartsonly
after a very long wait
(around2to3minutes).
Somefilessuppliedwiththememorystickmaygreatlyslowdown
accesstoreadingthememorystick(multiplicationby10ofthe
cataloguetime).
Deletethefilessuppliedwiththememorystick
and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
structureonthememorystick.
When I connect my iPhone
as telephone and to the
USB port at the same time,
I am unable to play the
musicfiles.
When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces
thestreamingfunction.Thestreamingfunctiontakestheplaceof
the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period without
soundofthetrackbeingplayedwithApple
®
players.
Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port (the
USBfunctiontakespriorityoverstreaming).
Some characters in the
media information are not
displayed correctly while
playing.
Theaudiosystemdoesnotdisplaysometypesofcharacters. Usestandardcharacterstonametracksand
folders.
Playing of streaming files
doesnotstart.
Theperipheraldeviceconnecteddoesnotsupportautomaticplay. Starttheplaybackfromthedevice.
Thenamesoftracksand
thetracklengtharenot
displayed on the screen
whenstreamingaudio.
TheBluetoothprofiledoesnotallowthetransferofthisinformation.
Audio and Telematics
260
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
In changing the setting
of treble and bass the
equalizer setting is
deselected.
Theselectionofanequalizersettingimposesthebalancesettings.
Modifyingonewithouttheotherisnotpossible.
Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain
thedesiredmusicalambience.
In changing the equalizer
setting, treble and bass
returntozero.
When changing the
balance settings, the
distribution setting is
deselected.
Theselectionofadistributionsettingimposesthebalancesettings.
Modifyingonewithouttheotherisnotpossible.
Modify the balance or distribution settings to
obtainthedesiredmusicalambience.
When changing a sound
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.
When I select the "All
passengers" mode, the
distribution is not as I
wouldlike.
Thechoiceofan"Allpassengers"distributioncanbeprogrammed. Modify the distribution setting using the slider on
thetouchscreen.
Settings
Audio and Telematics
261
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between the
differentaudiosources.
Foroptimumsoundquality,theaudiosettingsforVolume:,Bass:,
Treble:,AmbienceandLoudnesscanbeadaptedtothedifferent
sound sources, which may result in audible differences when
changingsource.
Checkthattheaudiosettingsfor(Volume:,Bass:,
Treble:,Ambience,Loudness)areadaptedtothe
sourceslistenedto.Itisadvisabletosettheaudio
functions(Bass:,Treble:,Balance)tothemiddle
position, select the "None" musical ambience
and set the loudness correction to the "Inactive"
positioninradiomode.
With the engine off, the
system switches off after a
fewminutesofuse.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time
dependsonthestateofchargeofthebattery.
Theswitch-offisnormal:thesystemswitchestoeconomymodeand
switchesofftopreventdischargingofthevehicle'sbattery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
Audio and Telematics
262
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
I cannot connect my
Bluetoothtelephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the
telephonemaynotbevisible.
Checkthatyourtelephone'sBluetoothfunctionis
switchedon.
Checkinthetelephonesettingsthatitis"Visible
toall".
TheBluetoothtelephoneisnotcompatiblewiththesystem. Youcancheckthecompatibilityofyourtelephone
atwww.citroen.co.uk(services).
The volume of the
telephone connected
in Bluetooth mode is
inaudible.
Thevolumedependsbothonthesystemandonthetelephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume of
thetelephoneifnecessary.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone
communication.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the
windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow
down...).
Some contacts are
duplicatedinthelist.
The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the
contactsontheSIMcard,thecontactsonthetelephone,orboth.
When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be
duplicated.
Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
telephonecontacts".
Contacts are not shown in
alphabeticalorder.
Sometelephonesofferdisplayoptions.Dependingonthesettings
chosen,contactscanbetransferredinaspecificorder.
Modify the display setting in the telephone
directory.
The system does not receive
SMStextmessages.
The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to
thesystem.
Telephone
Audio and Telematics
263
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10a_SMEGplus_ed02-2016
Audio and Telematics
265
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Audio system
Audio system / Bluetooth
®
Contents
First steps 266
Steeringmountedcontrols 267
Menus 268
Radio 268
Media 270
Telephone 274
Screenmenumap(s) 276
Frequentlyaskedquestions 280
Your Audio system is coded in such a way that it will only operate
inyourvehicle.
As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations
whichrequireprolongedattentionwhilethevehicleisstationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the
battery,theaudioequipmentmayswitchoffafterafewminutes.
Audio and Telematics
266
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
First steps
*Availableaccordingtoversion.
On/Off,volumesetting.
Selectsource:
Radio;USB;AUX;CD;Streaming.
Displaythelistoflocalstations.
Longpress:CDtracksorMP3folders
(CD/USB).
Selectthescreendisplaymode:
Date, audio functions, trip computer,
telephone.
Audiosettings:
Front/rearfader,left/rightbalance,
bass/treble,loudness,audio
ambiences.
The DARK button changes the
screen display for improved driving
comfortatnight.
1
st
press:upperbaronlyilluminated.
2
nd
press:blackscreen.
3
rd
press:returntostandarddisplay.
Select next frequency
down/up.
Selectprevious/nextMP3
folder.
Selectprevious/nextfolder/genre/
artist/playlist(USB).
Abandonthecurrentoperation.
Confirm.
Buttons 1 to 6
Selectapre-setradiostation.
Longpress:pre-setastation.
Automatic frequency search
down/up.
Selectprevious/nextCD,MP3or
USBtrack.
EjectCD.
Displaymainmenu.
TA (Traffic Announcements)
on/off.
Longpress:PTY*(radioProgramme
TYpe).
SelectAM/FMwavebands.
Audio and Telematics
267
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Steering mounted controls
Radio:selecttheprevious/nextpre-
setstation.
USB:selectgenre/artist/folder
fromtheclassificationlist.
Selecttheprevious/nextitemina
menu.
Volumedecrease.
Radio:automaticsearchforahigher
frequency.
CD/MP3/USB:selectthenext
track.
CD/USB:continuouspress:fast
forward.
Moveinthelist.
Mute:pressthevolumeincrease
and decrease buttons
simultaneously.
The sound is restored by pressing
oneofthetwovolumebuttons.
Radio:automaticsearchforalower
frequency.
CD/MP3/USB:selecttheprevious
track.
CD/USB:continuouspress:rewind.
Moveinthelist.
Changeaudiosource.
Confirmaselection.
Call/endcallonthetelephone.
Pressformorethan2seconds:
telephonemainmenu.
Volumeincrease.
Audio and Telematics
268
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Menus
Screen C
Audio functions
Radio;CD;USB;AUX.
Trip computer
Enter distances; Alerts; State of
functions.
Bluetooth
®
: Telephone - Audio
Pairing;Hands-freekit;Streaming.
Personalisation-configuration
Vehicle parameters; Display;
Languages.
For an overview of the menus available,
refer to the "Screen menu map"
section.
Screen A
Radio
Selecting a station
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select the
radio.
Press the BAND AST button to
selectawaveband.
Briefly press one of the buttons to
carry out an automatic search of the
radiostations.
Press one of the buttons to carry out
amanualsearchup/downforradio
frequencies.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of stations received
locally(30stationsmaximum).
To update this list, press for more
thantwoseconds.
Audio and Telematics
269
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
RDS
The external environment (hills,
buildings, tunnels, basement car
parks,...)mayblockreception,
includinginRDSmode.Thisisa
normal effect of the way in which radio
waves are transmitted and does not
indicateanyfailureoftheaudiosystem.
Press the MENUbutton.
Select "Audio functions".
Press OK.
Select the "FM waveband
preferences"function.
Press OK.
Select "Activate RDS".
Press OK, RDS is displayed in the
screen.
In "Radio" mode, press OKdirectlytoactivate/
deactivateRDSmode.
RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
retuningtoalternativefrequencies.
However, in certain conditions, coverage
of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the country as radio stations
donotcover100%oftheterritory.This
explains the loss of reception of a station
thatcanoccurduringajourney.
Receiving TA messages
Press the TA button to activate or
deactivatetrafficmessages.
The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
messages.Tooperate,thisfunction
needs good reception of a radio station
transmittingthistypeofmessage.
When a traffic report is transmitted, the
currentaudiosource(Radio,CD,...)
is interrupted automatically to play the
TAmessage.Normalplaybackofthe
audio source resumes at the end of the
transmissionofthemessage.
Audio and Telematics
270
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Media
USB port
This unit consists of a USB port
andanauxiliaryJacksocket,
dependingonmodel.
InsertaUSBmemorystickintotheUSBport
or connect a USB peripheral device to the USB
portusingasuitablecable(notsupplied).
The system creates playlists
(temporarymemory),whichcantake
from a few seconds to several minutes
onthefirstconnection.
Reducing the number of non-music
files and the number of folders reduces
thiswaitingtime.Playlistsareupdated
every time the ignition is switched off or
aUSBmemorystickisconnected.
Thelistsarememorised:ifthelistsare
not changed, the subsequent loading
timeisreduced.
Press and hold REFRESH LIST to
displaythedifferentclassifications.
Select by "Folder"/"Artist"/
"Genre"/"Playlist".
Press OK to select the classification
required, then press OK again to
confirm.
Press REFRESH LIST briefly to
display the previously selected
classification.
Navigate through the list using the
left/rightandup/downbuttons.
Confirm the selection by pressing
OK.
Press one of these buttons to gain
accesstotheprevious/nexttrackin
thelist.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fastforwardorrewind.
Press one of these buttons to
gainaccesstotheprevious/next
"Folder"/"Artist"/"Genre"/
"Playlist"inthelist.
To protect the system, do not use a
USBhub.
Audio and Telematics
271
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
Connect the portable device (MP3 player, …) to
theauxiliaryJacksocketusinganaudiocable
(notsupplied).
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select AUX.
Firstadjustthevolumeonyourportabledevice
(toahighlevel).Thenadjustthevolumeon
youraudiosystem.Operationofcontrolsisvia
theportabledevice.
Do not connect a device to both the
JackauxiliarysocketandtheUSBport
atthesametime.
CD player
Insertcircularcompactdiscsonly.
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs
or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may
cause faults which are no reflection on the
qualityofthevehicle'splayer.
Insert a CD in the player, play begins
automatically.
To play a disc which has already
been inserted, press the SOURCE
button several times in succession
and select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
trackontheCD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
displaythelistoftracksontheCD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fastforwardorrewind.
Audio and Telematics
272
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
The audio system will only play files with the
extension".mp3"withasamplingrateof
22.05KHzor44.1KHz.Noothertypeoffile
(.wma,.mp4,.m3u,etc.)canbeplayed.
It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters without using special characters
(e.g."?;ù)toavoidanyplayingordisplaying
problems.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or
CDRW,whenrecording,theISO9660level1.2
orJolietfileformatisrecommended.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may
notbeplayedcorrectly.
It is recommended that the same recording
format is always used for an individual disc,
with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
foroptimumsoundquality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Jolietformatisrecommended.
Information and advice
To play a disc which has already
been inserted, press the SOURCE
button several times in succession
and select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
folderontheCD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
trackontheCD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of directories of the
MP3compilation.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fastforwardorrewindplay.
Playing an MP3 CD
compilation
InsertanMP3CDcompilationintheplayer.
The audio equipment searches for all of the
musictracks,whichmaytakeanythingbetween
a few seconds and several tens of seconds,
beforeplaybegins.
On a single disc, the CD player can
read up to 255 MP3 files spread over
8folderlevels.However,itisadvisable
tokeeptoalimitoftwolevelstoreduce
the access time before the CD is
played.
While the CD is being played, the folder
structureisnotfollowed.
All of the files are displayed on a single
level.
Audio and Telematics
273
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
UseonlyUSBmemorysticksformattedFAT32
(FileAllocationTable).
It is recommended that you use
genuine Apple
®
USB cables for correct
operation.
* In certain cases, play of the audio files must
beinitiatedfromthekeypad.
**Ifthetelephonesupportsthefunction.
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming
Streaming allows music files on the telephone
tobeplayedviatheaudiosystem.
Connectthetelephone:seethe"Telephone"
section.
Select in the "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio"
menuthetelephonetobeconnected.
The audio system connects to a newly paired
telephoneautomatically.
Controloftrackstobeplayedisviathebuttons
on the audio system control panel and the
steeringmountedcontrols**.Thecontextual
informationcanbedisplayedinthescreen.
Activate the streaming source by
pressing the SOURCE*button.
Connecting Apple
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port
usingasuitablecable(notsupplied).
Playstartsautomatically.
Controlisviatheaudiosystem.
The classifications available are those of the
portabledeviceconnected(artists/albums/
genres/playlists/audiobooks/podcasts).
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
your Apple
®
player.
To protect the system, do not use a
USBhub.
Audio and Telematics
274
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Telephone
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
telephone
Screen C
(Available according to model and version)
As a safety measure and because they
require prolonged attention on the part
of the driver, the operations for pairing
of the Bluetooth
®
mobile telephone with
the Bluetooth
®
hands-free system of
your audio equipment must be carried
out with the vehicle stationary and the
ignitionon.
Gotowww.citroen.co.ukformoreinformation
(compatibility,morehelp,...).
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth
®
function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
configuration).
Press the MENUbutton.
Inthemenu,select:
- "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio"
- "Bluetooth configuration"
- "Perform a Bluetooth search"
A window is displayed with a message that a
searchisinprogress.
The services available depend on
thenetwork,theSIMcardandthe
compatibility of the Bluetooth
®
device
used.
Consult your telephone's manual and
your operator to find out which services
areavailabletoyou.
*Ifyourtelephoneisfullycompatible.
The first 4 telephones recognised are displayed
inthiswindow.
The "Telephone" menu permits access to the
followingfunctionsinparticular:"Directory"*,
"Calls list", "Consult the paired equipment".
Select the telephone to be connected from the
list.Onlyonetelephonecanbeconnectedat
atime.
Avirtualkeypadisdisplayedinthescreen:
enteracodewithatleast4digits.
Confirm by pressing OK.
A message in the screen indicates the telephone
chosen.Toacceptthepairing,enterthesame
code on the telephone, then confirm with OK.
If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not
limited.
A message that the pairing has been
successfulappearsinthescreen.
The automatic connection authorised is only
activeafterthetelephonehasbeenconfigured.
The directory and the call list can be accessed
afterthenecessarysynchronisationperiod.
Audio and Telematics
275
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
superimposeddisplayinthescreen.
Select the YES tab on the display
usingthebuttons.
Confirm by pressing OK.
Press this button at the steering
mountedcontrolstoacceptthecall.
Making a call
From the "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio"
menu.
Select "Manage the telephone call".
Select "Call".
Or
Select "Calls list".
Or
Select "Directory".
Press this button for more than two
seconds for access to your directory,
thennavigateusingthethumbwheel.
Or
Todialanumber,useyourtelephone'skeypad,
withthevehiclestationary.
Ending a call
During a call, press this button for
morethan2seconds.
Confirm with OKtoendthecall.
The system accesses the telephone's
contacts directory, depending on its
compatibility, and while it is connected
by Bluetooth
®
.
With certain telephones connected by
Bluetooth
®
you can send a contact to
thedirectoryoftheaudiosystem.
Contacts imported in this way are
saved in a permanent directory
visible to all, whatever the telephone
connected.
The menu for the directory is not
accessibleifitisempty.
Audio and Telematics
276
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Screen menu map(s)
Radio-CD
REG mode
CD repeat
Shuffle play
Vehicle cong*
R wiper in rev
Options
Diagnostic
RDS options
View
Abandon
1
2
3
3
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
Screen A
* The settings vary according to the trim level of
thevehicle.
Guide lighting
2
Units
Temperature: °Celsius / °Fahrenheit
Fuel consumption: KM/L - L/100 - MPG
1
2
2
Display adjust
Month
Day
Hour
Minutes
Year
12 H/24 H mode
Language
Italiano
Nederlands
Portuguès
Português do Brasil
Français
Deutsch
Čeština
English
Hrvatski
Español
Magyar
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Audio and Telematics
277
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Screen C
Press the OK dial for access to
short-cut menus according to the
displayonthescreen.
activate / deactivate RDS
activate / deactivate REG mode
activate / deactivate radiotext
Radio
activate / deactivate Intro
CD / MP3 CD
activate / deactivate track repeat
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate random play
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate track repeat
(ofthecurrentfolder/artist/genre/
playlist)
USB
activate / deactivate random play
(ofthecurrentfolder/artist/genre/
playlist)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Audio and Telematics
278
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Screen C
Audio functions
Alternative frequencies (RDS)
Activate/deactivate
FM preferences
Regional mode (REG)
Activate/deactivate
Radio-text information (RDTXT)
Activate/deactivate
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
Play modes
Album repeat (RPT)
Activate/deactivate
Trackrandomplay(RDM)
Activate/deactivate
2
3
4
3
4
Enter distance to destination
1
1
1
2
2
2
Pressing the MENUbuttondisplays:
Audio functions
Trip computer
Distance: x miles
Vehicle diagnosis
Warning log
Systems activated or deactivated
State of systems
Audio and Telematics
279
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Bluetooth conguration
1 1
1
2 2
2 2
2
3
3
3
2
3
Normal video
Brightness-video adjustment
Display conguration
Dene the vehicle
parameters*
Inverse video
Brightness(-+)adjustment
Date and time adjustment
Settingtheday/month/year
Settingthehour/minute
Choiceof12h/24hmode
Choice of units
l/100km-mpg-km/l
°Celsius/°Fahrenheit
1
1
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
Personalisation-
conguration
Bluetooth: Telephone -
Audio
Telephone function
Delete a paired equipment
Connect/Disconnect an equipment
Audio Streaming function
Consult the paired equipment
Perform a Bluetooth search
Calls list
Call
Directory
Terminate the current call
Manage the telephone call
Activate secret mode
*Thesettingsvaryaccordingtovehicle.
Choice of language
1
Audio and Telematics
280
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Thetablebelowgivesanswerstothemostfrequentlyaskedquestionsonyouraudiosystem.
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
With the engine off, the
audio system switches off
afterafewminutesofuse.
When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time
dependsonthestateofchargeofthebattery.
Theswitch-offisnormal:theaudioequipmentswitchestoeconomy
mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's
battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The message "the audio
system is overheated"
appearsonthedisplay.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature
is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal
protection mode leading to a reduction in volume or CD play
stopping.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
allowthesystemtocool.
Frequentlyaskedquestions
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between the
different audio sources
(radio,CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound
sources, which may result in audible differences when changing
source(radio,CD...).
Checkthattheaudiosettings(Volume,Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
thesourceslistenedto.Itisadvisabletoset
the audio functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "None"
and set the loudness correction to the "Active"
position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position
inradiomode.
Radio
Audio and Telematics
281
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The stored stations do not
function (no sound,
87.5Mhzisdisplayed...).
Anincorrectwavebandisselected. Press the BAND AST button to return to the
waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
stationsarestored.
The traffic announcement
(TA)isdisplayed.Ido
not receive any traffic
information.
The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information
network.
Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
information.
The quality of reception of
the radio station listened
to gradually deteriorates
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5Mhzisdisplayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station
listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area
throughwhichthevehicleistravelling.
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
tocheckwhetherthereisamorepowerful
transmitterinthegeographicalarea.
Theenvironment(hills,buildings,tunnels,undergroundcarparks...)
blockreception,includinginRDSmode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicateafailureoftheaudioequipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
throughanautomaticcarwashorintoanundergroundcarpark).
HavetheaerialcheckedbyaCITROËNdealer.
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
2secondsinradiomode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for another
frequencygivingbetterreceptionofthestation.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon
istoofrequentandalwaysonthesameroute.
Audio and Telematics
282
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10b_RD45_ed02-2016
Media
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The message "USB
peripheral error" is
displayedonthescreen.
The Bluetooth
®
connection
iscut.
Thebatteryoftheperipheralmaynotbesufficientlycharged. Rechargethebatteryoftheperipheraldevice.
TheUSBmemorystickisnotrecognised.
TheUSBmemorystickmaybecorrupt.
ReformattheUSBmemorystick.
TheCDisejected
automatically or is not
playedbytheplayer.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain
any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot
play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is
notrecognisedbytheaudioequipment.
- CheckthattheCDisinsertedintheplayer
therightwayup.
- ChecktheconditionoftheCD:theCD
cannotbeplayedifitistoodamaged.
- Checkthecontentinthecaseofarecorded
CD:consulttheadviceinthe"Audio"section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
playDVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDswillnotbeplayedbytheaudiosystem.
The CD player sound is
poor.
TheCDusedisscratchedorofpoorquality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitableconditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are
unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
anambience.
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
I am unable to access my
voicemail.
Fewtelephonesorserviceprovidersallowtheuseofthisfunction.
Telephone
Audio and Telematics
283
TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
10
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10c_BTA-3R_ed02-2016
Localised Emergency Call
For Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan.
If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, and independently of
the deployment of any airbags, an
emergencycallismadeautomatically.
If you benefit from the CITROËN
Connect Box offer with the SOS and
assistancepackincluded,thereare
additional services available to you in
your personal space, via the Internet
websiteforyourcountry.
In an emergency, press this
buttonformorethan2seconds.
Flashing of the green LED and
a voice message confirm that
the call has been made to the
"Localised Emergency Call" call
centre*.
The green LED remains on (without flashing)
whencommunicationisestablished.
Itgoesoffattheendofthecall.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels
therequest.
ThegreenLEDgoesoff.
"Localised Emergency Call" immediately
locates your vehicle, starts communication with
you in your language**, and where necessary
sends the appropriate public emergency
services**.Incountrieswheretheserviceis
not available, or when the locating service has
been expressly declined, the call is sent directly
to the emergency services (112) without the
vehiclelocation.
* Subjecttothegeneralconditionsforthe
serviceavailablefromdealersandsubject
totechnologicalandtechnicallimitations.
** Depending on the geographical cover of
"Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
Assistance Call" and the official national
language selected by the owner of the
vehicle.
The list of countries covered and Telematic
services is available from dealers or on the
websiteforyourcountry.
Emergency or assistance call
Audio and Telematics
284
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap10c_BTA-3R_ed02-2016
Localised Assistance Call
Operation of the system
If you purchased your vehicle outside
theBrand'sdealernetwork,we
inviteyoutohaveadealercheckthe
configuration of these services and, if
desired,modifiedtosuityourwishes.In
a multi-lingual country, configuration is
possible in the official national language
ofyourchoice.
For technical reasons and in particular
to improve the quality of "Telematic
services" services to customers, the
manufacturer reserves the right to carry
out updates to the vehicle's on-board
telematicsystem.
When the ignition is switched
on, the green LED comes on for
3 seconds indicating that the
systemisoperatingcorrectly.
The red indicator lamp is on
continuously:thereisasystem
fault.
A fault with the system does not prevent
thevehiclebeingdriven.
Press this button for more than
2 seconds to request assistance if
thevehiclebreaksdown.
** Depending on the geographical cover of
"Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
Assistance Call" and the official national
language selected by the owner of the
vehicle.
The list of countries covered and Telematic
services is available from dealers or on the
websiteforyourcountry.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels
therequest.
The cancellation is confirmed by a voice
message.
Geo-location
You can deactivate geo-location by
simultaneously pressing the "Localised
Emergency Call" and "Localised Assistance
Call" buttons, followed by a press on "Localised
AssistanceCall"toconfirm.
To reactivate geo-location, simultaneously
press the "Localised Emergency Call" and
"Localised Assistance Call" buttons again,
followed by a press on "Localised Assistance
CallLocalisé"toconfirm.
Theredindicatorlampflashes:replacethe
back-upbattery.
A voice message confirms that the call has
beenmade**.
In either case, the emergency and assistance
callsmaynotfunction.
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
possible.
For Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan.
07-16
Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application of the
provisionsoftheEuropeanlegislation(Directive2000/53)
relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the
objectivessetbythislegislationandthatrecycledmaterials
areusedinthemanufactureoftheproductsthatitsells.
Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document
is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles
CITROËN.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
4DCONCEPT
DIADEIS
Interak
Berlingo2VP_en_Chap00_couv-imprimeur_ed02-2016
Anglais
16BGO.0041*16BGO.0041*
18

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln
1

Forum

citroen-berlingo-multispace---2016
  • WIE KANN ICH DIE BATERIE LADEN OHNE AUS ZUBAUEN FINDE DEN PLUSPOL NICHT Eingereicht am 23-2-2022 21:22

    Antworten Frage melden
  • wie kann ich den schaltsack von einen citroen berlingo wechseln Eingereicht am 20-2-2022 15:16

    Antworten Frage melden
  • Beim Aktivierung der Fernbedienung. Wie lang muss ich den Schalter gedrückt halten Eingereicht am 12-2-2022 11:14

    Antworten Frage melden
  • Meinen Bordcomputer mit dem Hebel am Lenkrad einstellen. Eingereicht am 19-12-2021 13:33

    Antworten Frage melden
  • Mit Welchem anzugsdremoment muss ich die Reifen beim beringo multispace montieren? Eingereicht am 10-12-2021 12:15

    Antworten Frage melden
  • Wo ist der Schalter für die Nebelscheinwerfer beim Berlingo Puretech?
    Eingereicht am 11-11-2021 18:03

    Antworten Frage melden
  • wie kann ich die Nebelschlussleuchte und Nebelscheinwerfer einschalten? Eingereicht am 1-10-2020 08:29

    Antworten Frage melden
  • Wie kann man beim Citroën berlingo den Reifendruck initialisieren? Eingereicht am 17-5-2020 12:10

    Antworten Frage melden
  • Radiobetrieb bei ausgeschalteter Zündung möglich?
    Eingereicht am 5-5-2020 14:17

    Antworten Frage melden
  • Ist Radio hören bei ausgescghalteter Zübndung möglich?
    Eingereicht am 5-5-2020 13:28

    Antworten Frage melden
  • berlinre multispace halogenlampenwechsel - Sperrfeder wieder einsetzen Eingereicht am 2-8-2019 16:18

    Antworten Frage melden
  • Kann ich die Außenrückspiegel zum Einparken einklappen Eingereicht am 13-7-2019 15:01

    Antworten Frage melden
  • Heckfenster offen und Fahrzeug abschließen. geht dass
    Eingereicht am 26-2-2018 16:33

    Antworten Frage melden

Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Citroen Berlingo MultiSpace - 2016 wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Andere Handbücher von Citroen Berlingo MultiSpace - 2016

Citroen Berlingo MultiSpace - 2016 Bedienungsanleitung - Deutsch - 292 seiten

Citroen Berlingo MultiSpace - 2016 Bedienungsanleitung - Holländisch - 296 seiten

Citroen Berlingo MultiSpace - 2016 Bedienungsanleitung - Französisch - 292 seiten


Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info